From 06fef2d9bfa165fb3e20b13d72324a15c1b10fbb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Richard Mahn Date: Mon, 20 Feb 2023 23:24:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] Stephen's edits to 1TH (#3152) Co-authored-by: stephenwunrow Co-authored-by: Richard Mahn Co-authored-by: Stephen Wunrow Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/3152 --- tn_1TH.tsv | 561 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 1 file changed, 281 insertions(+), 280 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_1TH.tsv b/tn_1TH.tsv index 2ad798646c..1a4a66b971 100644 --- a/tn_1TH.tsv +++ b/tn_1TH.tsv @@ -1,16 +1,16 @@ Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note -front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 1 Thessalonians\n\nIn this letter, the apostle Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, encourages and makes appeals to the Thessalonian church (See: rc://*/tw/bible/names/thessalonica.md). Paul is the spokesman for all of them, using “we” to refer to the group, but in certain places Paul speaks for himself using “I” (See [2:18](../02/18.md); [3:5](../03/05.md); [5:27](../05/27.md)). The background story for the apostles’ activity in Thessalonica can be found in Acts 17:1–10.\n\n1. Apostolic memories of the Thessalonian church (1:1–10)\n * Greeting (1:1)\n * Thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2–4)\n * Examples of Thessalonian suffering (1:6–10)\n2. Apostolic authority (2:1–16)\n * Persecution of the church (2:1–13)\n * Opposition to the church (2:14–16)\n3. Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica (3:1–13)\n * Reason for the visit (3:1–5)\n * Report about the visit (3:6–13)\n4. Apostolic teachings (4:1–18)\n * Holiness (4:1–8)\n * Christian love (4:9–12)\n * Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)\n5. Final teachings (5:1–28)\n * Timing of the Second Coming of Christ (5:1–10)\n * Final appeals and teachings (5:11–28)\n\n### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Thessalonians, writing with the agreement of Silvanus and Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, Paul traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible.\n\nSilvanus is also mentioned in 2 Corinthians 1:19; 2 Thessalonians 1:1; 1 Peter 5:12. “Silas,” the name used in the book of Acts, is a contracted form of Silvanus; Silas and Silvanus are considered to be the same person. Timothy was leader of the church at Ephesus (See 1 Timothy 1:1–4). Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth with these two men. The mention of all three men in 1:1 indicates they were in Thessalonica together at some point.\n\n### What is the book of 1 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the church in the city of Thessalonica, after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. Ancient Thessalonica was located on the southeast coast of ancient Macedonia, and is now called Thessaloniki, located in northeast Greece. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background). In this letter Paul said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave (See Acts 17:1–10).\n\nPaul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Trinity\n\nIn this letter, the doctrine of the Holy Trinity finds solid support. The terms: God, Father, Son, Lord, Jesus, and Holy Spirit appear numerous times. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/god]])\n\n### The gospel\n\nIn this letter, Paul frequently refers to the apostles’ ministry of the gospel and uses different phrases to communicate the concept of God’s good news about Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])\n\n### Prayer\n\nPaul reassures the Thessalonians that his group of apostles frequently prays for them (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). He also gives instructions about prayer (See [5:2](../05/02.md)), and asks the Thessalonians to pray for them (See [5:25](../05/25.md)). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/pray]])\n\n### Faith and Faithfulness\n\nThrough the letter the Thessalonians are commended for their faithfulness to God. They are reminded to trust God and remain faithful to gospel living. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Apostolic authority\n\nMuch of this letter is a defense of the apostles authority, based on their teaching and living. The term “apostles” is used in [2:6](../02/06.md)) to reinforce that Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are sent by God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])\n\n### Second Coming of Christ\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.\n\n### The fate of reposed Christians\n\nPaul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians, for some of them worried that those Christians who died would miss the great “day of the Lord” when Jesus returns.\n\n### Idolatry\n\nThe Greek and Roman cultural background in Thessalonica meant that many members of the church were former pagans who practiced some sort of idolatry (See [1:9](../01/09.md)(See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/image]]).\n\n### Suffering\n\nMuch of this letter addresses both the sufferings of the apostles and the Thessalonian church for faithfulness to the gospel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/afflict]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/persecute]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/suffer]])\n\n### Sanctification\n\nThe concept of holiness is prevalent in this letter. Chapter four discusses how a Christian should practice a holy life. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sanctify]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in Christ Jesus” and “in the Lord Jesus Christ” and “in God the Father” and “in the Holy Spirit”?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a union between God and Christians that includes all three persons of the Trinity. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about these kinds of expressions.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “his coming” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus Christ”?\n\nPaul used “coming” in a specific way in relation to Jesus Christ to refer to the time when he will come again to earth, this time displaying his glory and power and gathering his people to himself. Depending on the nuances of your language, you may need to translate this with a special concept or word.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “the word of God” or “the word of the Lord”?\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul uses these well-known phrases or abbreviations to refer to the gospel message.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “brothers”?\n\nThroughout this letter, “brothers” is a metaphor that refers to all believers, including females. (See [1:4](../01/04.md); 2:1, 9, 14, 17; 3:7; 4:1, 6, 10, 13; 5:1, 4, 12, 14, 26, 27)\n\n### “We” and “you”\n\nIn this letter, the words “we”, “us,” and “our” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. In addition, “we”, “us,” and “our” are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.\n\n### Major textual issues in the text of the book of First Thessalonians\n\nWhen ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts in its text the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants)\n* “Grace and peace to you” (See [1:1](../01/01.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”\n* “but we became little children in the midst of you, as if a mother might comfort her own children” (See [2:7](../02/07.md)). Some other manuscripts read, “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.”\n* “Timothy, our brother and a servant of God” (See [3:2](../03/02.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1:intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Greeting (1:1)\n2. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian church (1:2–10)\n * Memory of the Thessalonians (1:2–5)\n * apostolic prayers (1:2)\n * work of the Thessalonians (1:2–3)\n * God’s election of the Thessalonians (1:4–5)\n * Thessalonians’ example (1:6–10)\n * reception of the apostles’ teaching (1:6)\n * examples to Macedonia and Achaia (1:7–10)\n * example of suffering (1:7)\n * preaching of the gospel (1:8)\n * turned away from idolatry to God (1:9)\n * waiting for the Second Coming of Christ (1:10)\n\nVerse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the senders identified themselves and the recipient and then gave a greeting.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Trinity\n\nGod the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. Paul can speak of each of them individually, but he describes them working together as God. Make sure that your translation distinguishes between Father, Son, and Holy Spirit but still identifies them as God. \n\n### Imitators and examples\n\nIn [1:8](../01/08.md), Paul describes how the Thessalonians became “imitators” of the apostles and of Jesus. They became “imitators” when they suffered but still experienced joy from the Holy Spirit. Paul then describes how this behavior made them “examples” for other believers to imitate (See: [1:7–8](../01/07.md)). Make sure that your translation indicates that the Thessalonians are imitating the apostles and Christ, which means that other people should imitate them. \n\n### The second coming\n\nIn [1:10](../01/10.md), Paul refers to the “second coming,” a specific day in the future in which Jesus will come back to earth, all dead people will come back to life, the world will be renewed, and God will judge people, punishing those who have sinned but rewarding those who believe in Jesus and obey him. Paul’s focus in this verse is especially on God’s judgment. Consider whether your readers will infer this information from what Paul says in [1:10](../01/10.md) or whether you should include some of this implied information. +front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 1 Thessalonians\n\n1. Opening and blessing (1:1)\n2. Giving thanks for the Thessalonians (1:2–10)\n * A prayer of thanks (1:2–5)\n * The Thessalonians as examples (1:6–10)\n3. The visit with the Thessalonians (2:1–16)\n * How Paul and his fellow workers behaved (2:1–12)\n * How the Thessalonians responded (2:13–16\n4. Separation from the Thessalonians (2:17–20)\n5. Timothy’s visit and good news (3:1–10)\n6. A benediction (3:11–13)\n7. Teaching on sexual morality (4:1–8)\n8. Teaching on Christian love (4:9–12)\n9. Teaching on the day of the Lord (4:13–5:11)\n * Dead believers and the day of the Lord (4:13–18)\n * The timing of the day of the Lord (5:1–11)\n10. Final Commands (5:11–22)\n11. Closing (5:23–28)\n\n### Who wrote the book of 1 Thessalonians?\n\nThe author identifies himself as Paul the apostle, and he writes that Silvanus and Timothy agree with what he says. In fact, throughout this letter, Paul commonly uses the plural pronouns “we” and “us” to refer to himself, Silvanus, and Timothy. Paul was originally from the city of Tarsus but lived in Jerusalem. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee, and he persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul first visited the Thessalonians during his second time traveling around the Roman Empire (see [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md)). When people started persecuting the Christians in Thessalonica, Paul went to a city named Berea. Then he traveled to Athens and then to Corinth, where Timothy met him after visiting the Thessalonians (see [Acts 17:10–18:5](../act/17/10.md)). When Timothy told Paul how the Thessalonians were doing, Paul wrote this letter to them in response. \n\n### What is the book of 1 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Thessalonians to make his relationship with the Thessalonians stronger and to teach them more about the gospel. He needed to do both of these things because, after he preached the gospel to the Thessalonians, persecution forced him to leave after only a few weeks.\n\nFirst, Paul wants the Thessalonians to know how much he was concerned about them and how joyful and thankful he was when he learned from Timothy that they were doing well. To accomplish this goal, he reminds the Thessalonians of how he and his fellow workers acted, he reminds the Thessalonians of how they responded, and he tells them how happy he is about the good news that Timothy brought. He tells them all these things to make his relationship with them stronger.\n\nAfter accomplishing this goal, he moves on to his second goal, which is to teach them more things about the gospel. It is possible that he was not able to teach some of these topics before he had to leave them. The primary topic he addresses is related to the day of Lord, the time in the future when Jesus will come back to this world. He also teaches them about sexual morality, loving fellow believers, the Holy Spirit, prophecies, and several other topics. \n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Thessalonians” or “1 Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica” or “A First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Thessalonica like?\n\nThe city of Thessalonica was an important city in the province of Macedonia, which is in the northern part of what we now call Greece. Thessalonica was important because it had a harbor and major roads going through the city and because it was the capital of the province. Because it was an important city, there were people from many cultures and religions there, including Jews. Most people in the city worshiped many gods, including the emperors of Rome.\n\n### The “day of the Lord” and the “coming of the Lord”\n\nThe phrase “the day of the Lord” refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will return to this world. Paul calls this event “the coming of the Lord.” Christians believe that, when Jesus comes back, God will resurrect all people, and Jesus will judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. In this letter, Paul teaches the Thessalonians about what will happen to believers who have died before this “day” (see [4:13–18](../04/13.md)). He also teaches the Thessalonians about how to expect and prepare for this “day” (see [5:1–11](../05/01.md)).\n\n### Why were the Thessalonians concerned about believers who had died?\n\nIt is possible that Paul had to leave the Thessalonians before he finished teaching about what will happen when Jesus comes back. It is also possible that the Thessalonians thought that Jesus would come back before any believers died. We cannot be sure about the reason why they were concerned, but it is clear that they were afraid that believers who had died would not experience all the amazing and good things that will happen when Jesus comes back. Paul reassures them that believers who have died will live again and meet Jesus before anyone who is still alive meets him. Because of that, the Thessalonians do not need to be concerned about believers who have died. \n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions like “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul frequently uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” (often with another name for Christ, such as Lord or Jesus) in this letter. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the word “brothers”?\n\nPaul often uses the term “brothers” to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Paul uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n\n### “We” and “you”\n\nIn this letter, unless a note specifies otherwise, the words “we,” “us,” and “our” always refer to Paul and his fellow workers, particularly Silvanus and Timothy, and do not include the Thessalonians. Also, in this letter, the words “you” and “your” are always plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 1 Thessalonians?\n\nIn the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations with which your readers may be familiar to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n* “Grace to you and peace” ([1:1](../01/01.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”\n* “little children” ([2:7](../02/07.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “gentle.”\n* “boasting” ([2:19](../02/19.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “great joy.”\n* “a servant of God” ([3:2](../03/02.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “a fellow worker of God.” Other ancient manuscripts have this: “fellow worker.” Other ancient manuscripts have this: “a servant of God and our fellow worker.”\n* “God … God” ([3:9](../03/09.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Lord … Lord.”\n* “the one giving” ([4:8](../04/08.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the one having given.”\n* “to you” ([4:8](../04/08.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “to us.”\n* “you have” ([4:9](../04/09.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “we have.”\n* “thieves” as the object of a verb ([5:4](../05/04.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “thief” as the subject of a verb.\n* “Test all things” ([5:21](../05/21.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “But test all things.”\n* “all the brothers” ([5:27](../05/27.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “all the holy brothers.”\n* “with you” ([5:28](../05/28.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “with you. Amen.” +1:intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Opening and blessing (1:1)\n2. Giving thanks for the Thessalonians (1:2–10)\n * A prayer of thanks (1:2–5)\n * The Thessalonians as examples (1:6–10)\n\nVerse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the senders identified themselves and the recipient and then gave a greeting.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Trinity\n\nGod the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. Paul can speak of each of them individually, but he describes them working together as God. Make sure that your translation distinguishes between Father, Son, and Holy Spirit but still identifies them as God. \n\n### Imitators and examples\n\nIn [1:8](../01/08.md), Paul describes how the Thessalonians became “imitators” of the apostles and of Jesus. They became “imitators” when they suffered but still experienced joy from the Holy Spirit. Paul then describes how this behavior made them “examples” for other believers to imitate (see [1:7–8](../01/07.md)). Make sure that your translation indicates that the Thessalonians are imitating the apostles and Christ, which means that other people should imitate them. \n\n### The second coming\n\nIn [1:10](../01/10.md), Paul refers to the “second coming,” a specific day in the future in which Jesus will come back to earth, all dead people will come back to life, the world will be renewed, and God will judge people, punishing those who have sinned but rewarding those who believe in Jesus and obey him. Paul’s focus in this verse is especially on God’s judgment. Consider whether your readers will infer this information from what Paul says in [1:10](../01/10.md) or whether you should include some of this implied information. 1:1 ms5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. For example, you may want to indicate that this is a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, wrote this letter to you, the church” -1:1 zivb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 **Paul** is the author of this letter. **Silvanus and Timothy** are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write” +1:1 zivb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 **Paul** is the author of this letter. **Silvanus and Timothy** are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write to the church” 1:1 r7n0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 The name **Silvanus** is a longer form of the name **Silas**, the form of the name used for this same man in the book of Acts. You could choose to use the shorter form here as well, or you could choose to use the longer form here and include a footnote explaining that they are forms of the same name. 1:1 z7wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ** to describe the union of believers with **God** and **Christ**. In this case, being **in God** and **Christ**, or united to God and Christ, identifies the Thessalonians as Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the Thessalonians have a very close relationship with **God** and **Christ**. Alternative translation: “that is united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “in union with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” -1:1 vlb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 When **God** is called **Father**, it highlights his relationship to **Jesus** as “Son” (See [1:10](../01/10.md)). Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. +1:1 vlb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 When **God** is called **Father**, it highlights his relationship to **Jesus** the “Son” (see [1:10](../01/10.md)). Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to retain these titles in your translation. 1:1 luw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 After stating his name and the people to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you” or “I pray that you will have grace and peace” 1:1 qx70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I pray that God will be favorable to you and give you a peaceful spirit” -1:1 nn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῖν 1 Throughout this letter the word **you** is plural and refers to the Thessalonian believers, unless otherwise noted. +1:1 nn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Throughout this letter the word **you** is plural and refers to the Thessalonian believers, unless otherwise noted. 1:1 e5eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **Grace to you and peace**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. -1:2 of3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here Paul states what he, Silvanus, and Timothy do more specifically first (they **give thanks to God**) and then describes it more generally (they are **making mention** of the Thessalonians). If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses. Alternate translation: “We continually make mention of you in our prayers, always giving thanks to God for all of you” +1:2 of3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here Paul first states what he, Silvanus, and Timothy do more specifically (they **give thanks to God**) and then describes it more generally (they are **making mention** of the Thessalonians). If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses. Alternate translation: “We continually make mention of you in our prayers, always giving thanks to God for all of you” 1:2 o7cp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντοτε & ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **always** and **continually** here as generalizations for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “very regularly … extremely often” 1:2 ga1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here, the word **continually** could modify: (1) **making mention {of you}**. Alternate translation: “making mention of you continually in our prayers” (2) “remembering” in the following verse ([1:3](../01/03.md)). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to omit the comma at the end of this verse. Alternate translation: “making mention of you in our prayers, continually” 1:3 ecw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μνημονεύοντες ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν; 1 Here, when Paul says that he and those with him are **remembering** things **before our God and Father**, he means that they are thanking God about specific things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “gratefully mentioning to our God and Father your work of faith and labor of love and endurance of hope of our Lord Jesus Christ” @@ -18,85 +18,81 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 1:3 s8as rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **work** that is: (1) a result of **faith**. Alternate translation: “your work produced by faith” (2) a proof of **faith**. Alternate translation: “your work that proves that you have faith” 1:3 tq4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **labor** that is: (1) a result of **love** for other believers. Alternate translation: “labor produced by love for others” (2) a result of **love** for God. Alternate translation: “labor produced by love for God” (3) a proof of **love**. Alternate translation: “labor that proves that you have love” 1:3 mshs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **endurance** that is: (1) a result of **hope**. Alternate translation: “endurance produced by hope” (2) a characteristic of **hope**. Alternate translation: “enduring hope” -1:3 kr8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **hope** that is about **our Lord Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of hope in our Lord Jesus Christ” +1:3 kr8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **hope** that is based in **our Lord Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of hope in our Lord Jesus Christ” 1:3 tvrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. The word **God** and the word **Father** refer to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” -1:3 v01e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. -1:4 psc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him give thanks to God (See: [1:2](../01/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “that is because we know” or “since we know” -1:4 erb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believers” -1:4 egkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” +1:3 v01e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν -1 In both places, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +1:4 psc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him give thanks to God (see [1:2](../01/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “which we do because we know” or “since we know” +1:4 erb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here and throughout the letter, Paul uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing friends” +1:4 egkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Throughout the letter, although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. 1:4 j08t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God is loving” 1:4 ohtl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐκλογὴν ὑμῶν, 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **election**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you have been chosen” or “that God has selected you” -1:5 jxfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **because** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him are sure about the Thessalonians’ “election” (See: [1:4](../01/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “which we are sure about because” +1:5 jxfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **because** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him are sure about the Thessalonians’ “election” (see [1:4](../01/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “which we are sure about because” 1:5 ude4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐγενήθη εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, Paul speaks of **our gospel** as if it were a person who could **come to you**. He means that the Thessalonians heard the gospel from Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you did not receive our gospel” 1:5 sm4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to speaking words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in speech” or “in spoken words” 1:5 t1w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** and **assurance**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in us acting powerfully and in the Holy Spirit working and in us being fully assured” 1:5 kjin rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 Here Paul could mean that: (1) Paul and those with him preached the gospel with **power** and with the help of **the Holy Spirit** and with **much assurance** that what they preached was true. Alternate translation: “we preached with power and with the Holy Spirit and with much assurance that it is true” (2) the Thessalonians experienced **power** and **the Holy Spirit** and **much assurance** when they heard the gospel. Alternate translation: “you experienced its power and the presence of the Holy Spirit and much assurance that it is true” 1:5 wdr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς οἴδατε οἷοι 1 Here, the phrase **just as you know** could introduce: (1) a basis for Paul’s claim about how the Thessalonians experienced the gospel. Alternate translation: “and you know that is true because you remember what kind of men” (2) a comparison between what Paul has said about how the Thessalonians experienced the gospel and what the Thessalonians know about Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “and that fits with what you know about what kind of men” -1:6 kgjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς & ἐγενήθητε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed became” or “it is you who became” +1:6 kgjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς & ἐγενήθητε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **became**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “it is you who became” 1:6 cs49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δεξάμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **having received** could introduce: (1) the way in which the Thessalonians **became imitators**. Alternate translation: “that is, you received” (2) when the Thessalonians **became imitators**. Alternate translation: “which you did when you received” 1:6 c2hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** represents a message that is made up of words, specifically the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gospel message” or “the words of the gospel” 1:6 wura rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν θλίψει πολλῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while being afflicted” or “while people made you suffer” 1:6 r7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “rejoicing because of the Holy Spirit” 1:6 ohen rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **joy** that is given by **the Holy Spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with joy from the Holy Spirit” or “with joy given by the Holy Spirit” -1:7 lwbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a result from how the Thessalonians became imitators of Paul, his fellow workers, and the Lord (See: [1:6](../01/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So” -1:7 et1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς τύπους πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 If your language would not use the abstract noun **examples**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you showed all the ones believing in Macedonia and in Achaia how to behave” or “all the believers in Macedonia and Achaia started to copy how you live” +1:7 lwbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a result from how the Thessalonians became imitators of Paul, his fellow workers, and the Lord (see [1:6](../01/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “and so” +1:7 et1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς τύπους πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 If your language would not use the abstract noun **examples**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you showed all the ones believing in Macedonia and in Achaia how to behave” or “all the ones believing in Macedonia and Achaia started to copy how you live” 1:7 xetp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 The word **Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. The word **Macedonia** is the same of a Roman province in the northern part of modern-day Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these words are names of provinces or regions. Alternate translation: “in the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” 1:8 smjv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how the Thessalonians became examples throughout Macedonia and Achaia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “More specifically,” or “Indeed,” 1:8 da73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφ’ ὑμῶν & ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have sounded out the word of the Lord” 1:8 qyk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the message about **the Lord**, which is the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the good news about the Lord” 1:8 sht4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξήχηται 1 Here, Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians were playing an instrument that makes a sound that can be heard from far away. He means that people in many places hear **the word of the Lord** because of how the Thessalonians act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has shone forth” or “has been heard” 1:8 w8b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 See how you translated the similar phrases in [1:7](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “in the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” -1:8 lxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἐξελήλυθεν 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians’ **faith** were a person who could travel to many places. He means that people in many places have heard about their **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have heard about your faith toward God in every place” or “news of your trust in God has been heard in every place” +1:8 lxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἐξελήλυθεν 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians’ **faith** were a person who could travel to many places. He means that people in many places have heard about their **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have heard about your faith toward God in every place” or “news of your faith toward God has been heard in every place” 1:8 esk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 Here, the word **faith** represents knowledge about the Thessalonians’ **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the news about your faith” or “knowledge concerning your faith” 1:8 bvkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way that you believe in” 1:8 wtg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if people in **every place** know about Thessalonians’ faith. The Thessalonians would have understood him to mean that their faith is known in many places, or in every place that Paul and his fellow workers visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into every place we go” or “throughout the world” -1:8 z9eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλεῖν τι 1 Here Paul implies that he does not **need to say anything** about the Thessalonians’ **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to say anything about your faith” -1:9 nsws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to say anything about the Thessalonians (See: [1:8](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is because” +1:8 z9eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλεῖν τι 1 Here Paul implies that he does not **need to say anything** about the Thessalonians’ faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “to say anything about your faith” +1:9 nsws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to say anything about the Thessalonians (see [1:8](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is because” 1:9 vfa3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **they themselves** refers to everyone who has heard about the Thessalonians’ faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the pronouns more explicit. Alternate translation: “they themselves who have heard about your faith report” -1:9 rd2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 Here, the word translated **themselves** emphasizes **they**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **they** in your language. Alternate translation: “they indeed report” or “it is they who report” +1:9 rd2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **they**, which is already implied in the verb **report**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **themselves**. Alternate translation: “as for them, they report” or “it is they who report” 1:9 qraf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **us** could include: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “us who preached the good news” (2) Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “you and us” -1:9 xeff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to his and his fellow workers’ visit to the Thessalonians as an **entrance**. He implies that the Thessalonians welcomed him and that it was a good visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “what a good visit we had with you” or “the wonderful way in which we visited you” -1:9 ushe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔσχομεν 1 Here, the word **we** refers only to Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. -1:9 u1um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων 1 Paul speaks of the Thessalonians as if they had been facing toward their **idols** and then **turned** around to face toward **God**. He means that they no longer worship idols, but now they worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you started worshiping God and left the idols behind” or “you abandoned the idols for God’s sake” +1:9 xeff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to his and his fellow workers’ visit to the Thessalonians as an **entrance**. He implies that the Thessalonians welcomed him and that it was a good visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “what a good visit we had with you” or “how wonderful it was when we visited you” +1:9 u1um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων 1 Paul speaks of the Thessalonians as if they had been facing toward their **idols** and then **turned** around to face toward **God**. He means that they no longer worship idols, and now they worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you started worshiping God and left the idols behind” or “you abandoned the idols for God’s sake” 1:9 fa47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal δουλεύειν 1 Here, the phrase **to serve** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which the Thessalonians **turned**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve” (2) a restatement of what it means for the Thessalonians to have **turned**. Alternate translation: “that is, you chose to serve” (3) the result the Thessalonians having **turned**. Alternate translation: “with the result that you serve” 1:9 ou5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 Here, the phrase **living and true God** identifies God as the one who lives and is truly God. The point is that God actually lives, unlike idols and other things that people may call gods, and that God really is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives and is the true God. Alternate translation: “the real God who actually lives” or “the only true God” 1:10 wkt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal καὶ ἀναμένειν 1 The phrase **to wait** is parallel with the phrase “to serve” in the previous verse ([1:9](../01/09.md)). Introduce it the same way you introduced “to serve.” Alternate translation: “and in order to wait for” or “and with the result that you wait for” 1:10 og49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God the Father. 1:10 wil8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Here Paul assumes that the Thessalonians know that Jesus ascended into **the heavens** and will someday come back to earth from there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “to return from his place in the heavens” or “to come back to earth after he ascended into the heavens” -1:10 ffro rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤγειρεν ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase **raised from the dead** refers to someone who died and came back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he restored to life after he had died” -1:10 r3nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” -1:10 dbcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish Ἰησοῦν, τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 1 The clause **the one rescuing us** is functioning as an adjective that describes Jesus in his role as rescuer. Paul is not distinguishing between more than one **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, our rescuer” or “Jesus, who rescues us” -1:10 pt1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonians–and by extension—all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “all of us believers in Christ” +1:10 ffro rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤγειρεν ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase **raised from the dead** refers to someone who died and came back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he restored to life after he had died” +1:10 r3nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” +1:10 dbcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish Ἰησοῦν, τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 1 The clause **the one rescuing us** describes Jesus in his role as rescuer. Paul is not distinguishing between more than one **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, our rescuer” or “Jesus, who rescues us” +1:10 pt1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “all of us believers” 1:10 g3zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from the time when God punishes people” or “so that God does not punish us in the future” 1:10 cx5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were someone who could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means that in the future God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” -2:intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1–13)\n * Apostolic preaching (2:1–6)\n * Apostolic conduct (2:7–9)\n * Apostolic witness (2:10–3)\n2. Persecution of the Church (2:14–16)\n * Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)\n * Jewish persecution (2:14b–16)\n3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17–20)\n\nThe first part of this chapter is a description of how Paul and his fellow workers preached the gospel to the Thessalonians. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. The third part is an expression of Paul’s deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s previous visit with the Thessalonians\n\nBefore he wrote this letter, Paul had briefly visited the city of Thessalonica and preached the gospel. He may have been in this city for only three weeks (See: [Acts 17:2](../act/17/02.md)), but many people still believed in Jesus during this time. They started the church of the Thessalonians, to whom Paul wrote this letter. However, Paul had to leave the city quickly because some Jewish people started a riot and tried to seize Paul and his fellow workers. You can read about this story in [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md). In this chapter, Paul describes how he and his fellow workers acted when he visited them, and he describes how the believers responded (See: [2:1–13](../02/01.md)). He also refers to how some Jewish people persecuted him and his fellow workers (See: [2:15–16](../02/15.md)). Finally, he describes how he wants to visit them again after he and his fellow workers had to leave so soon (See: [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). \n\n### God and the Thessalonians as “witnesses”\n\nIn [2:5](../02/05.md) and [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul names God as a “witness” to what he is saying, and he also names the Thessalonians as “witnesses” in [2:10](../02/10.md). Witnesses testify about whether something is true, so Paul names God and the Thessalonians as witnesses to show the Thessalonians that what he is saying is true. Your language may have a specific form for appealing to someone to guarantee that a statement is true. \n\n### “The Jews”\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul refers to people whom he calls “the Jews.” He does not mean Jewish people in general, since he refers to “the churches of God that are in Judea” as a separate group, and most if not all of these people were Jewish. Paul himself clarifies that he means “the ones having killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and having persecuted us.” This does not describe one group of people, since many of the people who killed God’s “prophets” died before Jesus came. What it does describe is a type of person: a person who opposes God and his messengers. When Paul refers to “the Jews” in this chapter, then, he is referring to Jewish people who oppose God and his messengers. You may need to make this more explicit in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Figures of speech related to families\n\nIn this chapter, Paul describes himself and his fellow workers as “little children” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), “mothers” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), and “fathers” ([2:11](../02/11.md)). He also refers to the Thessalonians as “brothers” ([2:1](../02/01.md), [9](../02/09.md), [14](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md)). Paul describes himself and his fellow workers in these ways to show the Thessalonians that he and his fellow workers love and care about them as if they were members of the same family. Paul especially emphasizes this since he was only with the Thessalonians for a short period of time. If possible, preserve the figures of speech that describe the Thessalonians and Paul and his fellow workers as members of the same family.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “We” and “You”\n\nIn this chapter, the words “we,” “us,” and “our” always refer to Paul and his fellow workers, particularly Silvanus and Timothy. These words do not include the Thessalonians. Also, in this chapter, the words “you” and “your” are always plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -2:1 ii5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a longer explanation of the “entrance” that Paul and his fellow workers had among the Thessalonians (See: [1:9](../01/09.md)). This explanation is found in [2:1–12](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Concerning our entrance to you,” or “Now about your visit,” -2:1 gpr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed know” or “it is you who know” -2:1 tdl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” -2:1 r14z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. +2:intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. The visit with the Thessalonians (2:1–16)\n * How Paul and his fellow workers behaved (2:1–12)\n * How the Thessalonians responded (2:13–16\n4. Separation from the Thessalonians (2:17–20)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s previous visit with the Thessalonians\n\nBefore he wrote this letter, Paul had briefly visited the city of Thessalonica and preached the gospel. He may have been in this city for only three weeks (see [Acts 17:2](../act/17/02.md)), but many people still believed in Jesus during this time. They started the church of the Thessalonians, to whom Paul wrote this letter. However, Paul had to leave the city quickly because some Jewish people started a riot and tried to seize Paul and his fellow workers. You can read about this story in [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md). In this chapter, Paul describes how he and his fellow workers acted when he visited them, and he describes how the believers responded (see [2:1–13](../02/01.md)). He also refers to how some Jewish people persecuted him and his fellow workers (see [2:15–16](../02/15.md)). Finally, he describes how he wants to visit them again after he and his fellow workers had to leave so soon (see [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). \n\n### God and the Thessalonians as “witnesses”\n\nIn [2:5](../02/05.md) and [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul names God as a “witness” to what he is saying, and he also names the Thessalonians as “witnesses” in [2:10](../02/10.md). Witnesses testify about whether something is true, so Paul names God and the Thessalonians as witnesses to show the Thessalonians that what he is saying is true. Your language may have a specific form for appealing to someone to guarantee that a statement is true. \n\n### “The Jews”\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul refers to people whom he calls “the Jews.” He does not mean Jewish people in general, since he refers to “the churches of God that are in Judea” as a separate group, and most if not all of these people were Jewish. Paul himself clarifies that he means “the ones having killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and having persecuted us.” This does not describe one group of people only, since many of the people who killed God’s “prophets” died before Jesus came. What it does describe is a type of person: a person who opposes God and his messengers. When Paul refers to “the Jews” in this chapter, then, he is referring to Jewish people who oppose God and his messengers. You may need to make this more explicit in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Figures of speech related to families\n\nIn this chapter, Paul describes himself and his fellow workers as “little children” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), “mothers” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), and “fathers” ([2:11](../02/11.md)). He also refers to the Thessalonians as “brothers” ([2:1](../02/01.md), [9](../02/09.md), [14](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md)). Paul describes himself and his fellow workers in these ways to show the Thessalonians that he and his fellow workers love and care about them as if they were members of the same family. Paul especially emphasizes this since he was only with the Thessalonians for a short period of time. If possible, preserve the figures of speech that describe the Thessalonians, Paul, and his fellow workers as members of the same family. +2:1 ii5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a longer explanation of the “entrance” that Paul and his fellow workers had among the Thessalonians (see [1:9](../01/09.md)). This explanation is found in [2:1–12](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Concerning our entrance to you,” or “Now about your visit,” +2:1 gpr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “as for you, you know” or “it is you who know” 2:1 r6cy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, just as in [1:9](../01/09.md), Paul refers to his and his fellow workers’ visit to the Thessalonians as an **entrance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that our visit with you” or “that our time with you” -2:1 g6qq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy but not the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “the entrance of me, Silvanus, and Timothy” 2:1 w584 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ κενὴ γέγονεν 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “has definitely been worthwhile” or “has been very useful” -2:2 nt5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul and his fellow workers might have visited the Thessalonians “in vain” (See: [2:1](../02/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “Instead of acting in vain,” +2:2 nt5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul and his fellow workers might have visited the Thessalonians “in vain” (see [2:1](../02/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “Instead of acting in vain,” 2:2 h9s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 These words provide background information about what happened when Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy were in the city of Philippi. You can read about this in [Acts 16:16–40](../act/16/16.md). Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “even though we suffered and were shamefully treated when we were in Philippi, just as you know” 2:2 w0qu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 Here, the phrases **having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated** refer to something that contrasts with **we were bold**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the phrases **having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated** with a word or phrase that introduces a contrast or something that is unexpected. Alternate translation: “despite having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated” or “even though we suffered previously and were shamefully treated” -2:2 fac4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how badly the apostles suffered. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “having earlier suffered violently” or “having already been shamefully abused” -2:2 f5d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑβρισθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having experienced shameful treatment” or “people having shamefully treated us” +2:2 fac4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much the apostles suffered. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “having earlier suffered violently” or “having already been shamefully abused” +2:2 f5d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑβρισθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having experienced mistreatment” or “people having mistreated us” 2:2 clqq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 Here Paul includes the phrase **just as you know** at the end of the information that he says they **know**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **just as you know** to wherever it would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But, just as you know, having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated at Philippi” 2:2 ddlx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in God** to describe the union of believers with **God**. In this case, being **in God**, or united to God, explains how Paul and his fellow workers were able to be **bold**. Paul could mean more specifically that: (1) **God** enabled them to be bold. Alternate translation: “with boldness from God” (2) they were bold because of their union with **God**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with God” 2:2 daei rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that relates to **God**. More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from God. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about God. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” 2:2 v4dg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Here, the phrase **much struggle** could refer: (1) generally to how difficult preaching the gospel was. Alternate translation: “in great difficulty” (2) specifically to people who opposed Paul. Alternate translation: “in much opposition” 2:3 hl9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers spoke the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is how we spoke:” or “Indeed,” -2:3 xg1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & παράκλησις ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ 1 If your language does not use nouns for some or all of the ideas in this verse, you can express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “when we appealed to you, we did not lead you astray, nor did we speak impurely, nor did we deceive you” +2:3 xg1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & παράκλησις ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ 1 If your language does not use nouns for some or all of the ideas in this verse, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “when we appealed to you, we did not lead you astray, nor did we speak impurely, nor did we deceive you” 2:3 sckc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ & παράκλησις ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul could be implying that this **exhortation** was addressed to: (1) the Thessalonians specifically. Alternate translation: “our exhortation to you” (2) anyone to whom Paul and his fellow workers proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “our exhortation to people” -2:3 mzm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης 1 Here Paul could be implying that the **exhortation** was not **from error** because: (1) he and his fellow workers did not try to convince the Thessalonians to believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from false teaching” (2) he and his fellow workers did not believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from our false beliefs” +2:3 mzm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης 1 Here Paul could be implying that the **exhortation** was not **from error** because: (1) he and his fellow workers did not try to convince the Thessalonians to believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from false teaching” (2) he and his fellow workers did not believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from false beliefs” 2:4 m8sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καθὼς δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, οὕτως λαλοῦμεν 1 Here Paul describes the manner in which he and his fellow workers **speak** something before he says that they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements so that Paul says what he is doing before he describes the manner in which he does it. Alternate translation: “we speak as those who have been examined by God to be entrusted with the gospel” -2:4 ue4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has examined us to entrust us with” +2:4 ue4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the idea with active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has examined us to entrust us with” 2:4 lfv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πιστευθῆναι 1 Here, the phrase **to be entrusted** introduces the result of being **examined by God**. Paul implies that God approved of them when he **examined** them, and so they were **entrusted with the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces the result of a test or examination. Alternate translation: “with the result that we were entrusted with” or “and approved to be entrusted with” -2:4 qqj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Θεῷ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but as pleasing to God” +2:4 qqj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Θεῷ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but as pleasing to God” 2:4 bq9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “our minds” or “what we think” 2:5 xk2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers spoke and acted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” -2:5 hqih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν, καθὼς οἴδατε 1 Here Paul includes the phrase **just as you know** in the middle of the information that he says they know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **just as you know** to wherever it would be natural in your language. See how you translated the similar form in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “For, just as you know, we were not at that time in a word of flattery” +2:5 hqih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν, καθὼς οἴδατε 1 Here Paul includes the phrase **just as you know** in the middle of the information that he says they know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **just as you know** to wherever it would be natural in your language. See how you translated the similar form in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “For just as you know, we were not at that time in a word of flattery” 2:5 qjty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποτε 1 Here, the phrase **at that time** refers to the time when Paul and his fellow workers visited the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the time of our visit” 2:5 lkx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean a message in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in a message of flattery” or “in speech of flattery” 2:5 ulcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns λόγῳ κολακίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **flattery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a flattering word” @@ -106,70 +102,63 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 2:6 afcc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν, οὔτε ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, οὔτε ἀπ’ ἄλλων 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for men, neither you nor others, to praise us” 2:6 j6c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” 2:7 a75z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers could have made the Thessalonians carry something heavy. He means that he and his fellow workers could have made the Thessalonians’ lives harder. More specifically, the **burden** could be: (1) Paul and his fellow workers demanding respect and obedience. Alternate translation: “being able to require your obedience” (2) Paul and his fellow workers demanding money and other things. Alternate translation: “being able to demand money from you” -2:7 y3bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγενήθημεν νήπιοι 1 Here, Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers **became little children**. He means that they treated the Thessalonians gently and did not use their authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we acted as mild as infants” or “we behaved gently” +2:7 y3bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγενήθημεν νήπιοι 1 Here, Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers **became little children**. He means that they treated the Thessalonians gently and did not use their authority harshly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we acted as mild as infants” or “we behaved gently” 2:7 u7y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants νήπιοι 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **little children**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “gentle.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. 2:7 bnp2 ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “among you” or “when we visited you” -2:7 ag1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 The point of this comparison is that in the same way a **mother** would gently **comfort her own children**, so the apostles gently and affectionately cared for the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language , you could make the meaning more explicit. Alternate translation: “and we loved you like mother who affectionately cares for her own children” or “as we affectionately cared for you” -2:7 q9bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 Here, the clause **as if a mother might comfort her own children** could be: (1) a further explanation of what Paul has already said about how they acted like **children**. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you, just as a mother might comfort her own children” (2) a description of what he is about to say about how they long for the Thessalonians (See: [2:8](../02/08.md)). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to to continue the sentence in the following verse instead of starting a new sentence there. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you. As a mother might comfort her own children,” +2:7 ag1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 The point of this comparison is that in the same way a **mother** would gently **comfort her own children**, so the apostles gently and affectionately cared for the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the meaning more explicit. Alternate translation: “and we loved you like mother who affectionately cares for her own children” or “as we affectionately cared for you” +2:7 q9bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 Here, the clause **as if a mother might comfort her own children** could be: (1) a further explanation of what Paul has already said about how they acted like **children**. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you, just as a mother might comfort her own children” (2) a description of what he is about to say about how they long for the Thessalonians (see [2:8](../02/08.md)). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to to continue the sentence in the following verse instead of starting a new sentence there. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you. As a mother might comfort her own children,” 2:8 r8b4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, the phrase **in this manner** could: (1) refer back to what Paul said in the previous verse about how he and his fellow workers love and care for the Thessalonians as if they were the Thessalonians’ mothers. Alternate translation: “in that very way” or “as a mother does” (2) make the word **longing** stronger. Alternate translation: “so very much” (3) refer ahead to what Paul and his fellow workers did because of their **longing**. Alternate translation: “in the following way:” 2:8 oxdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐδοκοῦμεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were happy” or “we considered it good” -2:8 pjp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (See: the similar phrase in [2:2](../02/02.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” +2:8 pjp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (see the similar phrase in [2:2](../02/02.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” 2:8 q86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς 1 Here, the word **souls** represents people and focuses particularly on who people are and what they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our own selves” -2:9 v837 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should believe Paul when he writes that he and his fellow workers loved and cared for the them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You know that is true because” or “In fact,” -2:9 gxvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believers” -2:9 exw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “siblings” +2:9 v837 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should believe Paul when he writes that he and his fellow workers loved and cared for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You know that is true because” or “In fact,” 2:9 tc98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τὸν κόπον ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν μόχθον 1 Here, **labor** and **toil** mean basically the same thing. The repetition emphasizes how hard the apostles worked. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “our toilsome labor” or “how hard we worked” 2:9 ylkl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **night and day** indicates that Paul and his fellow workers worked during both the day and the night. This means that they worked very much every day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “always” 2:9 kedf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy **burden** that he and his fellow workers could have asked the Thessalonians to carry for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternative translation, “so that none of you would have to support us financially” or “in order not to make life hard for any of you” -2:9 ezqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (See: the similar phrase in [2:8](../02/08.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” -2:10 re18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός, ὡς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he were summoning both the Thessalonians and God as **witnesses** to testify on their behalf before a judge. He means that the both the Thessalonians and God know how he and his fellow workers acted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You and God can declare how” or “You and God know how” +2:9 ezqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (see the similar phrase in [2:8](../02/08.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” +2:10 re18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός, ὡς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he were summoning both the Thessalonians and God as **witnesses** to testify on their behalf before a judge. He means that both the Thessalonians and God know how he and his fellow workers acted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You and God can declare how” or “You and God know how” 2:10 il3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως 1 The terms **piously**, **righteously**, and **blamelessly** mean similar things. Paul is using the three terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with only one or two terms. Alternate translation: “righteously” or “properly and and purely” -2:11 oug6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ἕνα ἕκαστον ὑμῶν, ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language (See: [2:10](../02/10.md)). Alternate translation: “how we were with each one of you as a father is with his own children” or “how we treated each one of you as a father treats his own children” +2:11 oug6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ἕνα ἕκαστον ὑμῶν, ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language (see [2:10](../02/10.md)). Alternate translation: “how we were with each one of you as a father is with his own children” or “how we treated each one of you as a father treats his own children” 2:11 i58m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 The point of Paul’s comparison is that Paul and his fellow workers are like fathers who model and instruct proper behavior for their **children**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the meaning more explicit. Alternate translation: “as a father teaches and trains his own children” or “we taught and disciplined you as fathers do with their own children” 2:12 clhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι 1 Here, the words **exhorting**, **encouraging**, and **testifying** describe ways in which Paul and his fellow workers acted like fathers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “by exhorting you and encouraging you and testifying to you” 2:12 m91e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι 1 The terms **exhorting** and **encouraging** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “exhorting you” 2:12 obhe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μαρτυρόμενοι 1 Here Paul could be implying that he and his fellow workers testify: (1) about how believers should behave. Alternate translation: “testifying about proper behavior” (2) to the truth of the good news. Alternate translation: “testifying to the truth of the gospel” -2:12 udek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to act” or “to live your lives” +2:12 udek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν ὑμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order that you might act” or “in order that you might live your lives” 2:12 go6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe what **God** considers to be worthy. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a way that honors God” or “in a way that God considers worthy” 2:12 v9ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul is adding more information about God. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one calling you” -2:12 vbd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν 1 Here, the phrase **kingdom and glory** could refer: (1) to two distinct things that God calls his people to participate in. Alternate translation: “into his own kingdom and his own glory” (2) to one thing described with two words connected by **and** (this is called hendiadys). Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” +2:12 vbd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν 1 Here, the phrase **kingdom and glory** could refer: (1) to two distinct things that God calls his people to participate in. Alternate translation: “into his own kingdom and his own glory” (2) to one thing described with two words connected by **and**. This is called hendiadys. Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” 2:13 au3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἡμεῖς εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ ἀδιαλείπτως, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) what Paul is about to write, which he introduces with the word **that**. Alternate translation: “And here is why we also thank God constantly: it is that” (2) what Paul has already written about how Paul and his fellow workers preached and how the Thessalonians welcomed them. Alternate translation: “And because of those things, we also thank God constantly, that” -2:13 ruy0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν 1 Here the words **we** and **us** include Paul and his fellow workers but not the Thessalonians, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. -2:13 qy80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **also** could imply that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers thank God about the Thessalonians like other people do (See: [1:8–10](../01/08.md)). Alternate translation: “we too” (2) Paul and his fellow workers are thanking God for additional things about the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “we yet again” +2:13 qy80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **also** could imply that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers thank God about the Thessalonians like other people do (see [1:8–10](../01/08.md)). Alternate translation: “we too” (2) Paul and his fellow workers are thanking God for additional things about the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “we yet again” 2:13 zja7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **continually** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. See how you translated the similar form in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “extremely often” 2:13 f6ta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγον ἀκοῆς & λόγον ἀνθρώπων & λόγον Θεοῦ 1 In this verse, Paul uses the term **word** to mean a message that is spoken by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spoken message of hearing … something spoken by men … something spoken by God” -2:13 ei3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that he connects with **hearing** and with **God**. He could mean that: (1) the **word** allowed the Thessalonians to hear about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word in which you heard about God from us” (2) the **word** is what the Thessalonians heard from Paul and his fellow workers, and this **word** is about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word which you heard from us about God” (3) the **word** is from **God**, and the Thessalonians heard it from Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “the word from God which you heard from us“ +2:13 ei3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that he connects with **hearing** and with **God**. He could mean that: (1) the **word** allowed the Thessalonians to hear about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word in which you heard about God from us” (2) the **word** is what the Thessalonians heard from Paul and his fellow workers, and this **word** is about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word which you heard from us about God” (3) the **word** is from **God**, and the Thessalonians heard it from Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “the word from God which you heard from us” 2:13 inhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of people” 2:13 z89g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς 1 Here, the word translated **which** could refer to: (1) **the word**. Alternate translation: “which word” (2) **God**. Alternate translation: “who” 2:13 ci1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται 1 Here Paul refers to **the word of God** as if it were a person doing work. He means that God uses **the word** to work in the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through which God is also working” or “which is also effective” 2:14-15 mh8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could include what the unbelieving **Jews** did first and then include how the Thessalonians are **imitators** of the believers in Judea. Alternate translation: “For the Jews, the ones having killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and having persecuted us, made the churches of God that are in Judea in Christ Jesus suffer. Now you, brothers, became imitators of them, because the same things you also suffered from your own countrymen, just as they also from the Jews, the ones not being pleasing to God and {being} hostile to all men,” 2:14 xopt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces proof of how God’s message is working among the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof or support for a claim. Alternate translation: “We know it is working in you because” or “Indeed,” -2:14 u40g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” -2:14 cj05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. 2:14 ij9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **churches** that belong to **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea without using the possessive form. Alternate translation: “of the churches that belong to God” 2:14 g0t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with **Christ Jesus**. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ, explains that **churches** are truly believers and have a relationship with Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that these believers are united to Christ. Alternate translation: “and that are united to Christ Jesus” or “and that are in union with Christ Jesus” -2:14 dnw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπάθετε, καὶ ὑμεῖς ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων συμφυλετῶν, καθὼς καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here, the phrase **the same things** refers to the phrase **just as they also from the Jews**. Paul means that the Thessalonians and the believers **in Judea** experienced the same kind of suffering and persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. You may need to rearrange the end of the verse to do so. Alternate translation: “you also suffered from your own countrymen exactly what they also suffered from the Jews” or “whatever they also suffered from the Jews you also suffered from your own countrymen” +2:14 dnw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπάθετε, καὶ ὑμεῖς ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων συμφυλετῶν, καθὼς καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here, the phrase **the same things** points to the phrase **just as they also from the Jews**. Paul means that the Thessalonians and the believers **in Judea** experienced the same kind of suffering and persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. You may need to rearrange the end of the verse to do so. Alternate translation: “you also suffered from your own countrymen exactly what they also suffered from the Jews” or “whatever they also suffered from the Jews you also suffered from your own countrymen” 2:14 f37l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν ἰδίων συμφυλετῶν 1 Although the term **countrymen** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “others from your own country” or “people who live in your city” -2:14 d7qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they also suffered these things from” -2:14 s27y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here Paul is referring to Jewish people who did not believe in Jesus and who persecuted those who did believe in Jesus. He is not referring to Jewish people in general, since **the churches of God that are in Judea** were mostly Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about **Jews** who did not believe persecuting other Jewish people who did believe. Alternate translation: “the Jews who did not believe in Jesus” or “the Jews who opposed Jesus” +2:14 d7qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they also suffered these things from” +2:14 s27y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here Paul is referring to Jewish people who did not believe in Jesus and who persecuted those who did believe in Jesus. He is not referring to Jewish people in general, since **the churches of God that are in Judea** were mostly Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about **Jews** who did not believe and who persecuted other Jewish people who did believe. Alternate translation: “the Jews who did not believe in Jesus” or “the Jews who opposed Jesus” 2:15 a6xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων; καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων 1 Paul provides this background information about “the Jews” to help readers understand exactly which Jews he is speaking about. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “by which I mean the Jews who in the past killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and persecuted us and who are not pleasing God and who are hostile to all men” -2:15 ucaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This list of those persecuted by the people whom Paul calls “the Jews” is not chronological, but emphasizes the order of importance and intensity of persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “the ones having killed the prophets, then the Lord Jesus, and finally persecuting us” +2:15 ucaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This list of those persecuted by the people whom Paul calls “the Jews” is not chronological but emphasizes the order of importance and intensity of persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “the ones having killed the prophets, then the Lord Jesus, and finally persecuting us” 2:15 wg1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς προφήτας 1 Here, the phrase **the prophets** refers to the prophets who are mentioned in the Old Testament. These prophets were also Jewish and spoke God’s message to his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the Jewish prophets” or “God’s prophets” 2:15 ywwr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul says **all men** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “to very many men” or “to the majority of men” 2:15 vfyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “to all men and women” -2:16 u012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κωλυόντων 1 Here, the word **forbidding** could introduce: (1) a reason why Paul says that the unbelieving Jews are not “pleasing to God” and are “hostile to all men” (See: [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “because they forbid” or “which is because they forbid” (2) the means by which the unbelieving Jews act in ways that are not “pleasing to God” and “hostile to all men” (See: [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “which they do by forbidding” -2:16 fo8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 Here Paul implies that he speaks the gospel **to the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to speak the gospel” -2:16 r5fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τοῖς ἔθνεσιν & ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 Here, the clause **so that they might be saved** expresses the purpose for which Paul and his fellow workers **speak to the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Gentiles, which we do so that they might be saved“ -2:16 ceve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God might save them” +2:16 u012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κωλυόντων 1 Here, the word **forbidding** could introduce: (1) a reason why Paul says that the unbelieving Jews are not “pleasing to God” and are “hostile to all men” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “because they forbid” or “which is because they forbid” (2) the means by which the unbelieving Jews act in ways that are not “pleasing to God” and “hostile to all men” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “which they do by forbidding” +2:16 fo8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers speaks the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to speak the gospel” +2:16 r5fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τοῖς ἔθνεσιν & ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 Here, the clause **so that they might be saved** expresses the purpose for which Paul and his fellow workers **speak to the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Gentiles, which we do so that they might be saved” +2:16 ceve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God might save them” 2:16 z5fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 Here Paul is referring to how the unbelieving Jews **fill up their sins**. He does not mean that **the Gentiles** who are saved are filling up their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that these unbelieving Jews always fill up their sins” 2:16 n2ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 Here, Paul speaks of how the unbelieving Jews sin as if it were filling something up with sins. He could mean: (1) that they commit many sins all the time. Alternate translation: “so that they commit many sins at many times” (2) that they commit enough sins that God will punish them. Alternate translation: “so that they always commit enough sins for God to punish them” 2:16 jzjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἔφθασεν & ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 Here Paul could be using the past tense phrase **has come upon them** to indicate that: (1) the **wrath** will **come** in the future. In this case, Paul uses the past tense to indicate that the **wrath** is certain or will be revealed soon. Alternate translation: “the wrath will certainly come upon them” or “the wrath will soon come upon them” (2) **wrath** has already **come** when Paul wrote this letter. In this case, at the time Paul wrote this letter, the unbelieving Jews were already experiencing the **wrath**. Alternate translation: “the wrath has already come upon them” (3) God had already revealed the **wrath** would eventually **come**. In this case, people already know about the **wrath** but will experience it in the future. Alternate translation: “it has already been revealed that the wrath will come upon them” 2:16 btod rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ὀργὴ 1 Here Paul implies that **the wrath** is God’s **wrath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s wrath” -2:16 uwuq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν & ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this word in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “God has punished them” or “they will be punished” -2:16 h8ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τέλος 1 Here, the phrase **to the end** could mean that God’s **wrath has come up them**: (1) completely or totally. In this case, God reveals all of his **wrath**, not just some of it. Alternate translation: “totally” or “fully” (2) at a moment at the end of a period of time. In this case, the unbelieving Jews are sinning until God finally reveals his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “finally” or “at last” (3) at the end of this world. In this case, the **end** refers to when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “at the end of this world” or “when Jesus returns” +2:16 uwuq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν & ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this word in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “God has punished them” or “they have been punished” +2:16 h8ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τέλος 1 Here, the phrase **to the end** could mean that God’s **wrath has come up them**: (1) completely or totally. In this case, God reveals all of his **wrath**, not just some of it. Alternate translation: “totally” or “fully” (2) at a specific moment at the end of a period of time. In this case, the unbelieving Jews are sinning until God finally reveals his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “finally” or “at last” (3) at the end of this world. In this case, the **end** refers to when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “at the end of this world” or “when Jesus returns” 2:17 edb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces how Paul and his fellow workers act in contrast to the people that Paul has described in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” -2:17 tpp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing friends” -2:17 m5sf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. 2:17 yhhy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers had to leave the Thessalonians soon after arriving in their city and preaching the good news to them. You can read about this in [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having been forced to leave you” or “having had to go away from you” 2:17 ci7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπορφανισθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md) shows that people who opposed Paul did it. Alternate translation: “opponents having separated us” or “persecution having separated us” 2:17 lmpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας 1 Here, the phrase **for the time of an hour** refers to a short span of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar phrase or plain language. Alternate translation: “for a short time” @@ -177,48 +166,49 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 2:17 yxzu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet περισσοτέρως ἐσπουδάσαμεν τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 The terms **extremely eager** and **in much desire** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly desired to see your face” or “became filled with much eagerness to see your face” 2:17 ot1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν 1 The phrase **to see your face** refers to visiting someone and being with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” 2:17 jgi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desire**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which we greatly desire” or “for which we yearn” -2:18 zlny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διότι 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) basis or evidence for Paul’s claim in the previous verse that he and his fellow workers were eager to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “You know that is true because” (2) an inference from Paul’s claim in the previous verse about how eager he and his fellow workers were to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” +2:18 zlny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διότι 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) the basis or evidence for Paul’s claim in the previous verse that he and his fellow workers were eager to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “You know that is true because” (2) an inference from Paul’s claim in the previous verse about how eager he and his fellow workers were to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” 2:18 pnw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθεῖν 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “to go” -2:18 n0jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ μὲν Παῦλος, καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “indeed I, Paul, desired to come to you both once and twice” +2:18 n0jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ μὲν Παῦλος, καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “indeed I, Paul, desired to come to you both once and twice” 2:18 yj0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Here, the phrase **both once and twice** could mean that: (1) Paul tried to visit the Thessalonians multiple times. In this case, Paul does not clarify how many times he tried. Alternate translation: “many times” (2) Paul tried to visit them twice. Alternate translation: “two times” or “twice” 2:18 uuae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέκοψεν ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul means that Satan prevented him and his fellow workers from visiting the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “prevented us from doing so” or “made it impossible for us to come” -2:19 j7j5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Paul is using the question form to to show the Thessalonians how much he and his fellow workers value and care about them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “For here is our hope and joy and crown boasting: it is even you before our Lord Jesus at his coming!” or “For you are our hope and joy and crown of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming.” +2:19 j7j5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Paul is using the question form to to show the Thessalonians how much he and his fellow workers value and care about them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “For here is our hope and joy and crown of boasting: it is also you before our Lord Jesus at his coming!” or “For you are our hope and joy and crown of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming.” 2:19 mj9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τίς & ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 In the next question, Paul identifies the **hope**, **joy**, and **crown** as the Thessalonians themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question so that Paul is asking about people instead of things. Alternate translation: “who gives us hope and joy and a crown of boasting” 2:19 jfak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what makes us hopeful or joyful or gives us a crown of boasting” -2:19 uvb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **crown** that leads to or causes **boasting**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “crown about which we boast” -2:19 e7tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, the word **crown** represents the honor and recognition that someone receives for accomplishing a task or goal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “reward about which we boast” or “honor about which we boast” +2:19 uvb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **crown** that enables or causes **boasting**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “crown about which we boast” +2:19 e7tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, Paul speaks of the honor and recognition that someone receives for accomplishing a task or goal as if it were a **crown**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “reward about which we boast” or “honor about which we boast” 2:19 hrvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants καυχήσεως 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **of boasting**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “of great joy.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. -2:19 q7f2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Here, the phrase **Or {is it} not even you** could: (1) introduce a second question that answers the first question. Paul is saying that the Thessalonians will be their **hope**, **joy**, and **crown** at Jesus’ **coming**. Alternate translation: “of boasting? In fact, is it not even you who are these things before Lord Jesus at his coming?” (2) be a second question that answers the longer question the phrase interrupts. In this case, you could use a form that marks the phrase as an interruption, or you could move it to the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “of boasting—is it not even you?—before our Lord Jesus at his coming?” or “of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming? Is it not even you?” +2:19 q7f2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Here, the phrase **Or {is it} not even you** could: (1) introduce a second question that answers the first question. Paul is saying that the Thessalonians will be their **hope**, **joy**, and **crown** at Jesus’ coming. Alternate translation: “of boasting? In fact, is it not also you who are these things before our Lord Jesus at his coming?” (2) be a second question that answers the longer question that the phrase interrupts. In this case, you could use a form that marks the phrase as an interruption, or you could move it to the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “of boasting—is it not also you?—before our Lord Jesus at his coming?” or “of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming? Is it not also you?” 2:19 wf6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 3 Here, the word **Or** introduces the correct answer to the question that Paul asked in the first half of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a correct answer, or you could leave **Or** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” 2:19 h7gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **before our Lord Jesus** implies that Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians will be examined by **the Lord Jesus**. Paul is confident that Jesus will approve of the Thessalonians, which will give Paul and his fellow workers honor and joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “before our Lord Jesus when he examines everyone” or “when we all are judged by the Lord Jesus” +2:19 on7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 2 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. 2:19 mksc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 Here, the phrase **his coming** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he comes back to earth” or “at his return to us” 2:20 l3m0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a restatement of the point that Paul made in the previous verse (See: [2:19](../02/19.md)). Alternate translation: “Yes,” (2) the basis for the point that Paul made in the previous verse (See: [2:19](../02/19.md)). Alternate translation: “That is because” 2:20 nlbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “cause us to feel glorious and joyful” or “glorify us and make us happy” -3:intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Timothy’s Visit (3:1–5)\n * Apostolic concern (3:1–2)\n * Apostolic encouragement (3:3–5)\n2. Timothy’s Report (3:6–13)\n * Good news (3:6–10)\n * Apostolic prayer (3:11–13)\n\nThe first part of this chapter recounts Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica. The second part tells about his report to Paul and Silvanus at Athens. Lastly, the apostles offer a prayer on behalf of the Thessalonians.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Timothy’s return to Paul\n\nAfter Paul, Timothy, and Silvanus left Thessalonica, they visited a city named Berea. Then, they visited a city named Athens. In [3:1](../03/01.md), Paul mentions that he and Silvanus stayed in Athens and sent Timothy to visit the Thessalonians. Eventually, Paul left Athens and went to Corinth. While he was in Corinth, Timothy returned from visiting the Thessalonians (See: [Acts 18:1–5](../act/18/01.md)). In this chapter, Paul explains how happy he and his fellow workers became when they heard good news from Timothy about the Thessalonians. In fact, Timothy’s return to Paul is the reason why Paul wrote this letter.\n\n### Afflictions\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul refers to how he, his fellow workers, and other believers (including the Thessalonians) are or will experience afflictions. When Paul and his fellow workers visited Thessalonica and a nearby town named Berea, some other Jewish people tried to hurt them and have them arrested. These people also persecuted anyone who believed the gospel. You can read about these afflictions in [Acts 17:1–15](../act/17/01.md). Make sure that your translation clearly indicates this kind of persecution.\n\n### Paul’s prayer\n\nIn [3:11–13](../03/11.md), Paul includes a prayer that God would enable him and his fellow workers to visit the Thessalonians and that God would strengthen and bless the Thessalonians. Paul refers to God in the third person in this prayer, which was a common practice for this kind of prayer. Consider how you might include a prayer to God within a letter in your culture. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “We” and “You”\n\nIn this chapter, unless a note specifies otherwise, the words “we,” “us,” and “our” always refer to Paul and his fellow workers, particularly Silvanus and Timothy, and do not include the Thessalonians. Also, in this chapter, the words “you” and “your” are always plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -3:1 zvgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference or result based on what Paul said in the previous verses about how he and his fellow workers desired to visit the Thessalonians (See: [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or result. Alternate translation: “As a result of that” or “Because of that” -3:1 fqe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result στέγοντες 1 Here, the word **enduring** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “since we could endure it” (2) the time when Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “when we could endure it” +3:intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. Timothy’s visit and good news (3:1–10)\n6. A benediction (3:11–13)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Timothy’s return to Paul\n\nAfter Paul, Timothy, and Silvanus left Thessalonica, they visited a city named Berea. Then, they visited a city named Athens. In [3:1](../03/01.md), Paul mentions that he and Silvanus stayed in Athens and sent Timothy to visit the Thessalonians. Eventually, Paul left Athens and went to Corinth. While he was in Corinth, Timothy returned from visiting the Thessalonians (see [Acts 18:1–5](../act/18/01.md)). In this chapter, Paul explains how happy he and his fellow workers became when they heard good news from Timothy about the Thessalonians. In fact, Timothy’s return to Paul is the reason why Paul wrote this letter.\n\n### Afflictions\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul refers to how he, his fellow workers, and other believers (including the Thessalonians) are or will experience afflictions. When Paul and his fellow workers visited Thessalonica and a nearby town named Berea, some other Jewish people tried to hurt them and have them arrested. These people also persecuted anyone who believed the gospel. You can read about these afflictions in [Acts 17:1–15](../act/17/01.md). Make sure that your translation clearly indicates this kind of persecution.\n\n### Paul’s prayer\n\nIn [3:11–13](../03/11.md), Paul includes a prayer that God would enable him and his fellow workers to visit the Thessalonians and that God would strengthen and bless the Thessalonians. Paul refers to God in the third person in this prayer, which was a common practice for this kind of prayer. Consider how you might include a prayer to God within a letter in your culture. +3:1 zvgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference or result based on what Paul said in the previous verses about how he and his fellow workers desired to visit the Thessalonians (see [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or result. Alternate translation: “As a result of that” or “Because of that” 3:1 amxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers could no longer endure being separated from the Thessalonians and longing to see them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “enduring our separation from you no longer” or “no longer enduring how we long to see you” -3:1 n47x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι 1 Here Paul could be saying that: (1) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul and Silvanus should stay in Athens. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I thought it good that Silvanus and I should be left behind” (2) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul should stay in Athens by himself. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I though it good that I should be left behind” (3) only Paul could endure no longer and himself decided that he should stay in Athens by himself. In this case, Paul uses the plural form to refer to himself only. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, I thought it good that I should be left behind” (4) Paul and Silvanus could endure no longer and together decided that they should stay in Athens. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus and I thought it good to be left behind” +3:1 fqe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result στέγοντες 1 Here, the word **enduring** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “since we could endure it” (2) the time when Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “when we could endure it” +3:1 n47x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι 1 Here Paul could be saying that: (1) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul and Silvanus should stay in Athens. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I thought it good that Silvanus and I should be left behind” (2) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul should stay in Athens by himself. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I though it good that I should be left behind” (3) only Paul could endure no longer and himself decided that he should stay in Athens by himself. In this case, Paul uses the plural form to refer to himself only. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, I thought it good that I should be left behind” 3:1 ml5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλειφθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to remain” or “to have everyone else leave us behind” 3:1 jvh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀθήναις 1 The word **Athens** is the name of a city. It was one of the most important cities in the country we call Greece. -3:2 vsoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐπέμψαμεν Τιμόθεον & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **we** and **our** do not include the Thessalonians. Make sure that your translation fits with you chose to translate “we” in the previous verse. In this verse, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) Paul and Silvanus. Alternate translation: “Silvanus and I sent Timothy, our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I sent Timothy, my” +3:2 vsoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐπέμψαμεν Τιμόθεον & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **we** and **our** do not include the Thessalonians. Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to translate “we” in the previous verse. In this verse, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) Paul and Silvanus. Alternate translation: “Silvanus and I sent Timothy, our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I sent Timothy, my” 3:2 r42r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπέμψαμεν Τιμόθεον 1 Here Paul implies that he and Silvanus **sent Timothy** to visit the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we sent Timothy to you” 3:2 yyio rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our believing friend” 3:2 lkvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **servant** who could: (1) serve **God**. Alternate translation: “one who serves God” (2) serve other people for God’s sake. Alternate translation: “one who serves others for God’s sake” -3:2 wykn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **a servant of God**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a fellow worker of God.” Other ancient manuscripts read “ fellow worker.” Other manuscripts read “a servant of God and our fellow worker.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +3:2 wykn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **a servant of God**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a fellow worker of God.” Other ancient manuscripts read “fellow worker.” Other manuscripts read “a servant of God and our fellow worker.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. 3:2 dsnc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν 1 The preposition **in** could refer to: (1) how Timothy works to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “in preaching” (2) the means by which Timothy serves. Alternate translation: “by means of” 3:2 pqif rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that could be: (1) about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about Christ” (2) be from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel from Christ” -3:2 maoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στηρίξαι 1 Here, Paul is speaking of Timothy supporting or helping the Thessalonians in their faith as if he were making them stronger. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help” +3:2 maoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στηρίξαι 1 Here, Paul is speaking of Timothy supporting or helping the Thessalonians in their faith as if he were making them physically stronger. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help” 3:2 pizt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how you believe” -3:3 o4w8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) another purpose for which Paul sent Timothy to the Thessalonians to strengthen and comfort them (See: [3:2](../03/02.md)). Alternate translation: “in order that no one would be disturbed” (2) what Timothy strengthened and comforted the Thessalonians about. Alternate translation: “showing you that no one should be disturbed” or “that is, that no one be disturbed” +3:3 o4w8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) another purpose for which Paul sent Timothy to the Thessalonians to strengthen and comfort them (see [3:2](../03/02.md)). Alternate translation: “in order that no one would be disturbed” (2) what Timothy strengthened and comforted the Thessalonians about. Alternate translation: “showing you that no one should be disturbed” or “that is, that no one be disturbed” 3:3 v8q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μηδένα σαίνεσθαι ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν ταύταις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these afflictions disturb no one” 3:3 u7vo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν ταύταις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **afflictions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by being afflicted” or “by how we are afflicted” 3:3 s8s2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation for why the Thessalonians should not **be disturbed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation for a claim. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You should not be disturbed because” -3:3 t0vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed know” or “it is you who know” -3:3 cdaa rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τοῦτο 1 The pronoun **this** refers to experiencing the **afflictions** that Paul has mentioned. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to the **afflictions** more explicitly. Alternate translation: “for suffering these afflictions” +3:3 t0vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “as for you, you know” or “it is you who know” +3:3 cdaa rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τοῦτο 1 The pronoun **this** refers to experiencing the **afflictions** that Paul has mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the **afflictions** more explicitly. Alternate translation: “for suffering these afflictions” 3:3 rkx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κείμεθα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has appointed us” 3:3 gla7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive κείμεθα 1 By **we**, Paul includes himself, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. -3:4 w95u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For also** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should “know” that believers are appointed to be afflicted (See: [3:3](../03/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a claim. Alternate translation: “You should know that because” or “In fact,” +3:4 w95u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For also** introduces another reason why the Thessalonians should “not be disturbed by these afflictions” (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another reason for a claim. Alternate translation: “Another reason why you should not be disturbed is that” or “Further,” 3:4 wo6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἦμεν, προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν 1 Here, the word **we** in the clauses **we were with you** and **we were telling you** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. However, the word **we** in the clause **we are about to suffer affliction** does include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. 3:4 wuco rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι, καθὼς 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “we were telling you in advance, ‘We are about to be afflicted,’ just as” 3:4 nm1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people are about to afflict us” @@ -233,31 +223,29 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 3:5 ua7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπείρασεν ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul implies that he was worried not only that they would be **tempted** but also that they would stop believing when they were tempted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had somehow successfully tempted you” or “had tempted you with the result that you stopped believing” 3:5 gnow rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ κόπος ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **labor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what we had done among you” 3:5 jnzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς κενὸν 1 Here, the phrase **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, Paul’s **labor** will not help the Thessalonians if the tempter successfully tempts them. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” -3:6 r4pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what has actually happened in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse about what he was worried about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts a concern with what actually happened. Alternate translation: “Despite my fears,” or “But here is what really happened:” +3:6 r4pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what actually happened in contrast to what Paul was worried about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts a concern with what actually happened. Alternate translation: “Despite my fears,” or “But here is what really happened:” 3:6 esxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background ἄρτι 1 Here, the phrase **just now** introduces the event that prompted Paul to write this letter, 1 Thessalonians. When Paul writes that Timothy returned **just now**, he is referring to the time immediately before he began writing this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happened right before a person starts speaking about it. Alternate translation: “just before I started writing this letter,” or “a short while ago,” 3:6 gci4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πρὸς ἡμᾶς & ἡμῖν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμεῖς 1 Every time the words **us** or **we** appear in this verse, they include Paul and Silvanus, but they do not include Timothy or the Thessalonians, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. -3:6 tu8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **text**, you could express the same idea in another way. Paul implies that the **faith** is in God and **love** is for other people. Alternate translation: “that you continue to believe in God and love other people” +3:6 tu8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Paul implies that the **faith** is in God and **love** is for other people. Alternate translation: “that you continue to believe in God and love other people” 3:6 fu8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔχετε μνείαν ἡμῶν ἀγαθὴν πάντοτε 1 Here, the clause **you always have good memory of us** indicates that the Thessalonians remembered Paul and his fellow workers as people whom they liked and would want to meet again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable clause or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you always have pleasant memories about us” or “you always remember us fondly” 3:6 tf95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιποθοῦντες 1 Here, the word **longing** could introduce: (1) another thing that the Thessalonians do. If you use the following alternate translation, you should delete the comma before **longing**. Alternate translation: “and that you long” (2) a result of the kind of **memory** that the Thessalonians have. Alternate translation: “so that you long” -3:6 e6kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡμεῖς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we also long to see you” -3:7 dpij rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse about what Timothy said about the Thessalonians’ faith, love, and good memory of Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because of this good news” or “Because of what Timothy told us” -3:7 s9iv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing friends” -3:7 fotb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. +3:6 e6kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡμεῖς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we also long to see you” +3:7 dpij rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse about what Timothy reported about the Thessalonians’ faith, love, and good memory of Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because of this good news” or “Because of what Timothy told us” 3:7 by7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεκλήθημεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “we felt encouragement” or “God encouraged us” -3:7 grk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **about you** could identify: (1) what Paul and his fellow workers are **encouraged** about. Alternate translation: “concerning you” (2) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers are **encouraged**. Alternate translation: “because of you” -3:7 csz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 The terms **distress** and **affliction** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “in all our affliction” or “in all our troubles“ +3:7 grk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase translated **about you** could identify: (1) what Paul and his fellow workers are **encouraged** about. Alternate translation: “concerning you” (2) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers are **encouraged**. Alternate translation: “because of you” +3:7 csz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 The terms **distress** and **affliction** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “in all our affliction” or “in all our troubles” 3:7 e96u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν, διὰ τῆς ὑμῶν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **distress**, **affliction**, and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “whenever we were distressed and afflicted, through how you believe” 3:8 m2rq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why what Paul said in the previous verse about being encouraged is true (See: [3:7](../03/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “That happened because” -3:8 utk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure νῦν ζῶμεν, ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the basis for the first phrase. Alternate translation: “if you yourselves stand firm in the Lord, now we live” +3:8 utk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result νῦν ζῶμεν, ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the basis for the first phrase. Alternate translation: “if you yourselves stand firm in the Lord, now we live” 3:8 tcv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νῦν 1 Here, the word **now** could refer to: (1) the time when Paul and his fellow workers **live**. Alternate translation: “presently” or “at this moment” (2) the result of how the Thessalonians **stand firm**. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “then” 3:8 y1vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ζῶμεν 1 Here, the phrase **we live** means that Paul and his fellow workers are refreshed and able to enjoy their lives. Paul does not mean that they were dead or about to die and are now alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we can really live” or “we are refreshed” 3:8 zbyo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” 3:8 x4zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm in** indicates that people are remaining faithful to whomever they are **in**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you yourselves remain faithful to the Lord” or “you yourselves persist in trusting the Lord” -3:8 e3pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς στήκετε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed stand firm” or “it is you who stand firm” -3:9-10 pzq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ δεόμενοι εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον, καὶ καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν? 1 Here Paul is using the question form to show the Thessalonians how thankful he is that they continue to trust God. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “For we give back to God very many thanks concerning you for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you, night and day pleading earnestly to see your face and to provide what is lacking in your faith!” +3:8 e3pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς στήκετε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **stand**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “you indeed stand firm” or “it is you who stand firm” +3:9-10 pzq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ δεόμενοι εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον, καὶ καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν? 1 Here Paul is using the question form to show the Thessalonians how thankful he is that they continue to trust God. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this one as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “For we give back to God very many thanks concerning you for all the joy with which we rejoice before our God because of you, night and day pleading earnestly to see your face and to provide what is lacking in your faith!” 3:9 b5o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further information about how Paul and his fellow workers responded to the good news about the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Further,” 3:9 vu2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα & χαίρομεν & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **we** in the phrases **are we able** and **we rejoice** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. However, the word **our** in the phrase **our God** does include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. -3:9 pdc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τίνα & εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers owe God a debt that they can pay back by giving **thanks**. He means that the appropriate response to God’s work among the Thessalonians is give thanks to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how can we be thankful enough to God” or “what kind of thanksgiving could we give to God” +3:9 pdc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τίνα & εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers owe God a debt that they can pay back by giving **thanks**. He means that the appropriate response to God’s work among the Thessalonians is to give thanks to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how can we be thankful enough to God” or “what kind of thanksgiving could we give to God” 3:9 gvvx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τῷ Θεῷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **to God** and **our God**. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts read “to the Lord” and “our Lord.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. 3:9 j6pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for how joyfully we rejoice” 3:9 u00t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν 1 Here Paul uses both the word **joy** and the word **rejoice** to emphasize how much joy he and his fellow workers have. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “for how greatly we rejoice” or “for how much joy we experience” @@ -267,36 +255,35 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 3:10 eb26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 The phrase **to see your face** refers to visiting someone and being with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” 3:10 s0xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians together had one **face**, but he is referring to each of their faces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your faces” 3:10 uqwr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul could be implying that the Thessalonians are **lacking**: (1) knowledge about God that should be included in their **faith**. Alternate translation: “to teach you more about your faith” (2) some aspects of **faith** in God. Alternate translation: “to enable you to have faith completely” -3:10 e5fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the way you believe” -3:11-13 tet9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing δὲ & κατευθύναι 1 Here the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that … would guide” +3:10 e5fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in what you believe” +3:11-13 tet9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν, καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς, κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς. ὑμᾶς δὲ ὁ Κύριος πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι τῇ ἀγάπῃ εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας, καθάπερ καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς; εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν, ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ. ἀμήν! 1 Here Paul is asking God to bless the Thessalonians. You could express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But we ask our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus to direct our way to you. We ask the Lord to make you increase and abound in love for one another and for all, just as we also toward you, to strengthen your hearts, blameless in holiness before our God and Father, at the coming of our Lord Jesus with all his saints. Amen!” 3:11 kdk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” 3:11 um1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν, καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς, κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul speaks about God the Father and the Lord Jesus as if they were directing Paul’s way and his fellow worker’s ways. He could mean that God the Father and the Lord Jesus: (1) are like guides who take Paul and his fellow workers to meet the Thessalonians, which would enable Paul and his fellow workers to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “may our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus bring us to you” (2) enable Paul and his fellow workers to overcome obstacles that prevent them from visiting the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “may our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus remove everything that prevents us from visiting you” (3) lead Paul and his fellow workers on a straight path to the Thessalonians, which would enable Paul and his fellow workers to visit the Thessalonians soon. Alternate translation: “may our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus enable us to visit you soon” 3:11 f3wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. The word **God** and the word **Father** refer to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” -3:11 mc2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word translated **himself** emphasizes **our God and Father**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **our God and Father** in your language. Alternate translation: “he who is our God and Father” or “God our Father indeed” +3:11 mc2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun “he,” which is already implied in the the phrase **our God and Father**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **himself**. Alternate translation: “he who is our God and Father” or “God our Father indeed” 3:11 bql9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** in the phrases **our God** and **our Lord** includes all believers. The word **our** in the phrase **our way** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. 3:12 eeu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces the next part of Paul’s prayer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” 3:12 f4ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑμᾶς & ὁ Κύριος πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι 1 The terms **increase** and **abound** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “may the Lord make you very much abound” or “may the Lord make you increase greatly” -3:12 o80n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in how you love one another and all” -3:12 gyy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἰς πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun to refer to all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for all humans” -3:12 dm6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we also increase and abound in love toward you” -3:13 taws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι 1 Here the phrase **to strengthen** introduces the purpose for which Paul prays that the Lord will make the Thessalonians increase in love (See: [3:12](../03/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that he might strengthen” or “and I pray those things so that he might strengthen” +3:12 o80n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας, καθάπερ καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in how you love one another and all, just as we also love you” +3:12 gyy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἰς πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun to refer to all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for all humans” +3:12 dm6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we also increase and abound in love for you” +3:13 taws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι 1 Here the phrase **to strengthen** introduces the purpose for which Paul prays that the Lord will make the Thessalonians increase in love (see [3:12](../03/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that he might strengthen” or “and I pray those things so that he might strengthen” 3:13 ly21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 Here Paul speaks of the Thessalonians becoming spiritually stronger as if their **hearts** were being strengthened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to strengthen you spiritually” or “to make you stronger on the inside” 3:13 wb3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply words such as “so that they will be” if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “your hearts so that they will be blameless” or “your hearts so that you will be blameless” 3:13 ms8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in how holy you are” 3:13 p12j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **before our God and Father** refers to being in the presence of **our God and Father**. In this case, the phrase emphasizes that God is the one who will declare the Thessalonians to be **blameless in holiness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our God and Father” or “according to our God and Father” 3:13 jev8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. The word **God** and the word **Father** refer to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” +3:13 r8sb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν -1 In both places, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. 3:13 ytqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **the coming of our Lord Jesus** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus comes back to earth” or “at return of our Lord Jesus to us” 3:13 vnsi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **saints** could refer to: (1) believers. Alternate translation: “with everyone who believes in him” (2) believers and angels. Alternate translation: “with all his holy angels and those who believe in him” (3) angels. Alternate translation: “with all his holy angels” -4:intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes\n\n## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 4\n\n1. Apostolic Teachings on Holiness (4:1–8)\n2. Apostolic Teachings on Christian Love (4:9–12)\n * Reminder (4:9–10)\n * Keep Busy (4:11–12)\n3. Apostolic Teachings on the Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)\n\n## “We” and “You”\n\nIn this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Christian love\n\nThe apostles address the topic of Christian love that the Thessalonian church had previously asked about. The apostles encouraged the church that they were already loving well, and they should continue to grow in this practice. The apostles also link “brotherly love” to living in harmony with each other and minding their own business, so that they would be a good example to non-Christians (See [4:11–12](../04/11.md)).\n\n### Dying before the Second Coming of Christ\n\nThe Thessalonian church was concerned about what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They were anxious to know whether or not those who died before Christ returned would be part of the Kingdom of God. Paul addresses that concern in [4:13–5:11](../04/13.md).\n\n### The manner of the Second Coming of Christ\n\nIn [4:13–18](../04/13.md), the apostles teach about the events related to the Second Coming of Christ (called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md)). This is so that the Thessalonians can “comfort one another with these words” (See [4:18](../04/18.md)).\n\n## Important Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Sexual immorality\n\nDifferent cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate these sensitive issues.\n\n### The Second Coming of Christ and the Day of the Lord\n\nAll Christians believe that Jesus will return to earth to judge all people and to rule forever. As the Nicene Creed (381 A.D.) states: “I await the resurrection of the dead and the life of the age to come.” Christ came once as Incarnate God and will return once as Resurrected Judge. However, there are various ways that Christians understand the “coming of the Lord” as explained in [4:13–5:11](../04/13.md), and the “day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). Some believe they are one and the same event, but others believe them to be two separate events. Your translation should state clearly only what is clear in these verses without promoting any particular interpretation. +4:intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Teaching on sexual morality (4:1–8)\n8. Teaching on Christian love (4:9–12)\n9. Teaching on the day of the Lord (4:13–5:11)\n * Dead believers and the day of the Lord (4:13–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sexual morality\n\nIn [4:3–8](../04/03.md), Paul commands the Thessalonians to act in holy ways, particularly in relation to their sexual behavior. He does not provide specific details, but he does require them to exercise self-control and to avoid hurting a fellow believer. In the Thessalonians’ culture, sexual immorality was very common. Men and women would have sex with people who were not their own spouses, and older men would have sex with younger men. If a Christian had sex with another Christian to whom he or she was not married, it could easily hurt or exploit that person or that person’s family. Paul wants the Corinthians to completely avoid this possibility. \n\n### Brotherly love\n\nIn [4:9–12](../04/09.md), Paul praises the Corinthians for showing “brotherly love.” He means that they love each other as if they were members of the same family. He also encourages them to show this kind of love even more, which includes staying out of other people’s private affairs and making sure that they can provide for themselves instead of depending on other people. \n\n### Dead believers\n\nThe Thessalonians were worried that believers who had died might not experience some of the wonderful things that will happen when Jesus comes back. In [4:13–18](../04/13.md), Paul assures them that believers who had died not miss anything when Jesus comes back. In fact, he tells them that believers who have died will meet Jesus first, before everyone who is still alive meets him. He wants them to encourage or comfort each other with this teaching. \n\n### The coming of the Lord\n\nIn [4:13–18](../04/13.md), Paul teaches the Thessalonians about what will happen when Jesus comes back. He describes Jesus’ return with powerful language that includes angels, people being lifted up into the sky, and loud sounds. Scholars debate whether Paul described Jesus’ return with symbolic language or whether he described specific events that will happen when Jesus comes back. Your translation should express Paul’s descriptions as clearly as possible while allowing for both interpretations of his words. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “His own vessel”\n\nIn [4:4](../04/04.md), Paul urges each Thessalonian to “possess his own vessel in sanctification and honor.” Paul could be using the word “vessel” in several different ways. First (1), and most likely, he could be using “vessel” as a euphemism for the sexual organ. In this case, he is urging the Thessalonians to have self-control over their sexual desires the acts. Also, he is addressing men directly but also includes women in his command. Second (2), he could be using “vessel” as a metaphor for the physical body. In this case, he is focusing particularly on the sexual aspect of the physical body, just like in option (1). Third (3), and least likely, Paul could be using “vessel” as a metaphor for a man’s wife. In this case, he is urging each Thessalonian man to be sexually faithful to his wife. It is recommended that you follow option (1) or perhaps option (2) since these are the most likely explanations for why Paul uses the word “vessel.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “The ones sleeping”\n\nIn [4:13–15](../04/13.md), Paul refers to people who are “sleeping.” This was a polite way in his culture to refer to people who had died. Paul does not have any deeper meaning in mind. Consider how, in your culture, you might politely refer to people who had died. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Did Paul think that Jesus would come back before he himself died?\n\nIn [4:15](../04/15.md) and [4:17](../04/17.md), Paul uses the word “we” to include himself among the believers who are alive when Jesus comes back. Some scholars think that this implies that Paul believed or hoped that Jesus would come back before Paul died. However, other scholars think that Paul used the word “we” because he was referring to believers who are alive, and of course he was alive when he wrote this letter. In your translation, you should use an inclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction, but you should not include any further clarification. \n\n### What is the sequence of events in [4:15–17](../04/15.md)?\n\nIn these verses, Paul describes several events that will occur in sequence. Based on what he says, we can be relatively sure that the following three events will occur in this order: (1) the Lord Jesus will come down from heaven, (2) believers who have died will resurrect and go with the Lord, and (3) believers who are still alive with be taken up to meet the Lord in the air. It is less clear whether the “loud command,” the “voice of an archangel” and the “trumpet of God” happen before or during Jesus’ descent from heaven. Also, it is not clear whether Jesus and believers go up to heaven or come back to earth, although coming back to earth is slightly more likely. Make sure that your translation clearly presents the three main events in sequence, and if possible, allow for several different interpretations for the other elements. 4:1 udi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a development in Paul’s argument. He is transitioning from rejoicing about the Thessalonians to instructing them about how to act and what to believe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “So” or “Given all that” 4:1 vtas rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases λοιπὸν 1 Here, the word **finally** signals to the audience that Paul is starting the last section of his letter. The word does not mean that Paul is about to finish the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the last major part of a letter. Alternate translation: “lastly” or “in this last section” -4:1 fmuc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing friends” -4:1 p3be rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. 4:1 u2lw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 The terms **ask** and **encourage** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “we strongly encourage you” or “we urgently ask you” -4:1 foeh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord Jesus** to describe the union of believers with **Jesus**. In this case, being **in the Lord Jesus**, or united to Jesus, could specifically explain: (1) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort*** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with the Lord Jesus” (2) the authority by which Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “as those who represent the Lord Jesus” +4:1 foeh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord Jesus** to describe the union of believers with **Jesus**. In this case, being **in the Lord Jesus**, or united to Jesus, could specifically explain: (1) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with the Lord Jesus” (2) the authority by which Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “as those who represent the Lord Jesus” 4:1 p4db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατεῖν & περιπατεῖτε 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See you how you translated the similar phrase in [2:12](../02/12.md). Alternate translation: “to act … you are acting” or “to live your lives … you are living your lives” 4:1 ckii rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys περιπατεῖν καὶ ἀρέσκειν Θεῷ 1 Here, **to walk and to please** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **please** describes the way in which the Thessalonian church should **walk**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “to walk in a way that is pleasing to God” or “to walk so that you please God” -4:1 q937 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἵνα 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) what it is that Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians to do. Alternate translation: “we ask that” (2) the purpose for which Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “in order that” +4:1 q937 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἵνα 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) what it is that Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians to do. Alternate translation: “we ask that” (2) the purpose for which Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “in order that” 4:1 e3cd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσεύητε μᾶλλον 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers want the Thessalonians to **abound even more** in pleasing God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you might abound even more in doing what is pleasing to God” 4:2 ebjm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about how the Thessalonians received instructions from Paul and his fellow workers (See: [4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” 4:2 oyu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐδώκαμεν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul refers to what he and his fellow workers told the Thessalonians when they first visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we, when we were with you, gave you” @@ -307,7 +294,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 4:3 lgac rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν, ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **that you keep yourselves** introduces an explanation of what Paul means when he uses the word **sanctification**. This explanation continues in [4:4–6](../04/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “your sanctification, that is, that you keep yourselves” 4:3 uuu4 ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ 1 Alternate translation: “that you stay away from” or “that you avoid” 4:3 o59a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πορνείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **immorality**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing what is sexually immoral” or “acting in sexually immoral ways” -4:4 s4yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **that each of you knows** could: (1) give another example of what “sanctification” means (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and that each of you knows” (2) describe more specifically what it means to avoid “sexual immorality” (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “more specifically, that each of you knows” +4:4 s4yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **that each of you knows** could: (1) give another example of what “sanctification” means (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and that each of you knows” (2) describe more specifically what it means to avoid “sexual immorality” (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “more specifically, that each of you knows” 4:4 vhbp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν & κτᾶσθαι 1 Here, the word **knows** could refer specifically to: (1) learning how to do something. Alternate translation: “that each of you learns to possess” (2) understanding something. Alternate translation: “that each of you understands how to possess” 4:4 arkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 Here, the word **vessel** could refer to: (1) a person’s sexual organ. This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “to possess his own sexual organ” (2) a man’s wife. This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “to possess his own wife” 4:4 f4ux rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 The meaning of the verb **possess** depends on what the word **vessel** means (See: the previous note): (1) If the word **vessel** refers to the body or more specifically to the sexual organ, the word **possess** refers to people having control over their bodies. Alternate translation: “to exercise control over his sexual organs” or “to exercise sexual self-control” (2) If the word **vessel** refers to a wife, the word **possess** could refer to a man having sex with his wife. Alternate translation: “to have sexual relations with his wife” (3) If the word **vessel** refers to a wife, the word **possess** could refer to a man marrying a woman. Alternate translation: “to marry a wife” @@ -315,8 +302,8 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 4:4 ihqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sanctification** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in holy and honorable ways” 4:5 y9g2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 Here, **not in the passion of lust** contrasts with the previous phrase “in holiness and honor” (See: [4:4](../04/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “and in contrast, not in the passion of lust” 4:5 utvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **passion** and **lust**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “not passionately lusting” -4:5 vjej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to connect **passion** and **lust**. More specifically, he could be referring to: (1) **passion** that is characterized by **lust**. Alternate translation: “lustful passion” 2) **lust** that is characterized by **passion**. Alternate translation: “passionate lust” -4:5 nrmz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply words such as “behave” or “act” if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as also the Gentiles behave, the ones not knowing God” or “just as also the Gentiles, the ones not knowing God, act” +4:5 vjej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to connect **passion** and **lust**. More specifically, he could be referring to: (1) **passion** that is characterized by **lust**. Alternate translation: “lustful passion” (2) **lust** that is characterized by **passion**. Alternate translation: “passionate lust” +4:5 nrmz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply words such as “behave” or “act” if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as also the Gentiles behave, the ones not knowing God” or “just as also the Gentiles, the ones not knowing God, act” 4:5 w03g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 Here Paul is distinguishing from **Gentiles** who do not know God from Gentiles who do know God. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles, specifically the ones not knowing God” or “all the Gentiles who do not know God” 4:5 lbvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **not knowing God** means that these **Gentiles** do not listen to, trust in, or obey God. It does not mean that they do not know about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones not listening to God” or “the ones not obeying God” 4:6 ho6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ μὴ ὑπερβαίνειν 1 Here, the phrase **not to transgress** could introduce: (1) the purpose of what Paul has said in [4:3–5](../04/03.md) about abstaining from sexual immorality. Alternate translation: “in order not to transgress” (2) another example of what “sanctification” means (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and that each of you does not transgress” (3) another description of what it means to avoid “sexual immorality” (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “that each of you does not transgress” @@ -341,15 +328,14 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 4:8 azkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὑμᾶς 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “us.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. 4:9 uxn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” 4:9 rpmn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς φιλαδελφίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “loving the brothers” or “how to love others in a brotherly way” -4:9 sgen rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν, αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 If your language would naturally state a reason before its result, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because you yourselves are taught by God to love one another, you have no need {for us} to write to you” +4:9 qf9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς φιλαδελφίας 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **brotherly love** to refer to love for people who share the same faith, both men and women. If possible, use the same form you have used to translate the word “brothers.” Alternate translation: “love for believers” +4:9 sgen rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν, αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 If your language would naturally state a reason before its result, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because you yourselves are taught by God to love one another, you have no need {for us} to write to you” 4:9 l1n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἔχετε 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **you have**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “we have.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. -4:9 fyqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need **to write** to the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “since” +4:9 fyqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to write to the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “since” 4:9 ctiq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτοὶ & ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has taught you yourselves” -4:9 zroq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ & ὑμεῖς & ἐστε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed are” or “as for you, you are” -4:10 dec9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε 1 Here, the phrase **For also** introduces another reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to write to the Thessalonians (See: [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Again, we do not need to write to you about this, since you do” or “Even more, you do” -4:10 hg7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ 1 Here, the word **it** refers to “brotherly love” (See: [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you show brotherly love” -4:10 gxfa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς & ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the believers … believing friends” -4:10 lxpc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς & ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “all the brothers and sisters … brothers and sisters” +4:9 zroq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ὑμεῖς & ἐστε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “it is you who are” or “as for you, you are” +4:10 dec9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε 1 Here, the phrase **For also** introduces another reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to write to the Thessalonians (see [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Again, we do not need to write to you about this, since you do” or “Even more, you do” +4:10 hg7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ 1 Here, the word **it** refers to “brotherly love” (see [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you show brotherly love” 4:10 u3fl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a slight contrast between what the Thessalonians are doing and how Paul wants them to do it **even more**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Yet” 4:10 z51t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσεύειν μᾶλλον 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers want the Thessalonians to **abound** in brotherly love **even more**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to abound even more in brotherly love” 4:11 d2fg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡσυχάζειν 1 Here, the phrase **to be quiet** refers to living in a peaceful way that does not disrupt others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to avoid disrupting others” or “to behave calmly around other people” @@ -357,173 +343,188 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 4:11 jmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **work with your own hands** to indicate that the Thessalonians should support themselves instead of relying on others to provide for them. He does not mean that they must do physical labor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to provide for yourselves” or “to earn your own living” 4:11 bz8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ὑμῖν παρηγγείλαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to what he and his fellow workers **commanded** the Thessalonians when they visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “just as we commanded you when we visited you” 4:12 wj25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of doing what Paul has commanded in [4:10–11](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “with the result that” (2) the purpose of doing what Paul has commanded in [4:10–11](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “in order that” -4:12 hp6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατῆτε εὐσχημόνως 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may act properly” or “you may live your lives properly” +4:12 hp6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατῆτε 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may act” or “you may live your lives” 4:12 k59r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοὺς ἔξω 1 Here, the phrase **the ones outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Thessalonica. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders” or “the unbelievers” 4:12 nait rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδενὸς 1 Here word translated **nothing** could refer: (1) to things. In this case, Paul wants them to have everything that they need. Alternate translation: “of no essential things” (2) to people. In this case, Paul wants them to be independent and not rely on other people to provide for them. Alternate translation: “of nobody” or “of support from no person” 4:13 vi2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” 4:13 lan8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλομεν & ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **ignorant**. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” -4:13 p7nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing friends” -4:13 pcan rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. 4:13 j68e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τῶν κοιμωμένων 1 Here, the phrase **the ones sleeping** is a polite way to refer to people who have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar polite phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones having passed away” or “the ones who are dead” -4:13 ocjp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul wants to instruct the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose or goal. Alternate translation: “in order that” +4:13 ocjp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce the purpose for which Paul wants to instruct the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose or goal. Alternate translation: “in order that” 4:13 jggl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ λοιποὶ, οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the rest grieve, the ones not having hope” or “the rest who have no hope grieve” 4:13 p5zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οἱ λοιποὶ, οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 Here Paul is distinguishing between people who have hope and people who do not have hope. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “the rest who do not have hope” or “the rest, that is, those who do not have hope” 4:13 r9f8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **rest** as a noun to refer to a group of people that includes everyone who does not have hope. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the rest of people” or “everyone else” 4:13 f9eq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλπίδα 1 Here Paul implies that the **hope** concerns what happens to people after they die. People who do not have **hope** do not expect anyone who dies to live again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “hope that people will live again” or “hope of resurrection” -4:13 puvg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones not hoping for anything after people die” or “the ones not believing that people will live again” +4:13 puvg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones not hoping” or “the ones not expecting anything” +4:14 mola rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should not grieve like other people do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You should not grieve in those ways because,” or “Indeed,” 4:14 j09o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” -4:14 ybz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν 1 -4:14 hmw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 Here it is assumed that the Thessalonian church knows the apostolic teaching that **Jesus died and rose again**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we apostles trust―as you already know―that Jesus died and rose again” -4:14 kmk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὁ Θεὸς 1 the phrase **thus also** could go with: (1) **God will bring**. In this case, **thus also** indicates that believers will experience something like how Jesus died and rose again. (2) the implied phrase “we believe.” In this case, **thus also** indicates that believing that Christians will resurrect results from believing in Jesus’ resurrection. -4:14 skuw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄξει 1 (1) believers who have died and who are with Jesus in heaven. God will resurrect them and send them with Jesus when Jesus comes back. (2) believers who have died. God will resurrect them and bring them to be with Jesus in heaven. -4:14 m1fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 -4:14 tkhu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 (1) with **will bring** (2) with **having slept** -4:14 tjqj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 -4:15 vvda rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γὰρ ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 This clause indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to (See also [1:8](../01/08.md) for **the word of the Lord**). Alternate translation: “Certainly, what we now say to you is the Lord Jesus’ message” -4:15 ni3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 The phrase **the word of the Lord** refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Here, **word** could refer to: (1) the authority of the message. Alternate translation: “because the Lord Jesus authorized our message” (2) the means of the message. Alternate translation: “with a message from the Lord Jesus” -4:15 gbe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases Κυρίου, ὅτι ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **that** indicates that the rest of the verse is the content of **the word of the Lord**. You could indicate this by changing the punctuation or some other natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord: we” -4:15 fdwk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λέγομεν & ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 When Paul says **we say**, he is speaking of himself, Silvanus, and Timothy, so **we** would be exclusive. However, when Paul says **we who are alive**, since he seems to be referring to all Christians, **we, the ones being alive** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles say … all of us believers in Christ who are still alive” -4:15 hdlr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 This phrase gives us further information about **we, the ones being alive**. It is not making a distinction between **the ones being left behind** and **we, the ones being alive**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “and survive” or “and remain here” -4:15 b786 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [3:13](../03/13.md) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “until the Lord Jesus returns” or “for the Second Coming of the Lord Jesus” -4:15 xd2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 Here, the phrase translated **certainly not** is a strong prohibition meaning “never.” If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement as in the UST. Alternate translation: “will never precede those who are dead” or “are not permitted to come before those who have already died” -4:16 ah7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, **For** indicates that following events are related to the Second Coming. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this. Alternately translation: “Certainly,” or “Indeed,” -4:16 c26b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅτι αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ, καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 In this verse, Paul is describing events that happen at the same time **the Lord will descend from heaven**. He emphasizes the order of events by listing them prior to the main verb. If it is clearer in your language, you could place the main verb before the accompanying actions. You can also make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus himself will come down from heaven with a commanding shout, and with the archangel’s voice, and with God’s trumpet” -4:16 ygfp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 Paul uses the word **himself** to emphasize that the Lord Jesus will come back in person. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus will come back personally” or “the very person, the Lord Jesus” -4:16 z9ka ἀρχαγγέλου 1 See Jude 9 for the only other use of the word **archangel** in the Bible. -4:16 breq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a trumpet** that is related to God. Here, **trumpet of God** could refer to: (1) a trumpet that God commands to be blown. Alternate translation: “a trumpet that God orders to be blown” (2) a trumpet that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “God’s trumpet” -4:16 pjrh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ; καὶ οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον 1 The first main verb **descend** is listed after the events that describe it. This is to show contrast with the second verb **rise**. After the **Lord** Jesus comes down from **heaven**, the **dead** Christians will resurrect from the earth. Paul makes two opposite statements, in similar ways, to emphasis the dramatic nature of the Lord’s Second Coming. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “will come down from heaven, but the first to resurrect from the earth will be the dead people who are united to Christ” -4:16 k7sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 2 The word **and** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “and then after that,” or “and afterward,” -4:16 dr89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ νεκροὶ 1 Paul assumes that the Thessalonian church knows that **the dead** are the same as “those who are asleep” in [4:13–15](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated “fallen asleep” in [4:13–15](../04/13.md) -4:16 xrxu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks about **the dead** as though they were occupying space inside **Christ**. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to **Christ** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that living Thessalonian believers **in Christ** have with the believers **in Christ** who have died. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” -4:17 iy00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 Here, **Then** indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Afterward,” -4:17 l5l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 Though **we, the ones living** could be exclusive of the apostles (See note for the same phrase at [4:15](../04/15.md)), the universal content of this section implies that all Christians are in view, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ who remain alive” -4:17 otiq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 Here, Paul refers to “the dead in Christ” (See [4:16](../04/16.md)) as **them**. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “together with the dead in Christ -4:17 aj1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 Here, **together with them** could refer to: (1) a simultaneous event. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “with them at the same time” (2) association with the “dead in Christ.” Alternate translation: “along with the dead in Christ” (3) both event and association. Alternate translation: “at the same time together with the dead in Christ” -4:17 m3gb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 Here it is assumed that Paul is referring to the words of the angels at Jesus’ Ascension in [Acts 1:9–11] (acts/01/09.md), as a fulfillment of the prophecy in [Daniel 7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could provide a footnote or reference. -4:17 o7lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἀπάντησιν 1 Here, **to meet** is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why living believers **will be caught up together** with “the dead in Christ.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to encounter” -4:17 ukh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 Here, **clouds** and **air** could be considered symbolic language representing God’s presence and the spiritual realm (See Exodus 19; Daniel 7:13–14; Matthew 24; Mark 13; Luke 17; 21; Ephesians 2:2). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to spiritually encounter the Lord Jesus” -4:17 ti69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory καὶ οὕτως 1 This clause is meant to signal the end of the events related to the Second Coming. You can use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. -4:17 ouvu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὕτως 1 This clause also indicates the result of the meeting with **the Lord**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and then” or “as a result” -4:17 k6qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism σὺν Κυρίῳ 1 Here, **with the Lord** parallels **together with them** to express union with Christ as communion with his people. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. -4:18 gt91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε παρακαλεῖτε 1 This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “So then, keep encouraging” or “Because of this, you must comfort” -4:18 y7zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “you should encourage” or “please continue to comfort -4:18 aya5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀλλήλους 1 The pronoun **one another** refers to the Thessalonian church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “each fellow member of your church” or “your fellow Thessalonian believers in Christ” -4:18 xsus rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 Here, **with these words** could refer to “we will always be with the Lord” in [4:17](../04/17.md) or to all that has been said in [4:13–17](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “by reminding each other of our message” or “with these promises” -5:intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes\n\n## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 5\n\n1. Apostolic Teachings on the Second Coming of Christ (5:1–10)\n* Timing (5:1–3)\n* Preparation (5:4–8)\n* God’s plan (5:9–10)\n2. Final Instructions (5:11–28)\n* Final Commands (5:11–22)\n* Final Prayer (5:23–24)\n* Final Appeals (5:25–27)\n* Final blessing (5:25–27)\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nPaul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.\n\n## “We” and “You”\n\nIn this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idiom\n\n#### Day of the Lord\n\nThe “day of the Lord” is an idiom for the time of final salvation for God’s people and final judgment for God’s enemies. “Day” is metaphorical for a time period. Thus, the exact time of the coming “day of the Lord” will be a surprise to the world. The simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]])\n\n### Simile\n\n#### Like a thief\n\nThe simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope, and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Metaphor\n\n#### Day and night, light and darkness\n\nThe apostles use many metaphors throughout [5:1–11](../05/01.md). “Night,” “darkness,” “drunk,” “sleep” are all metaphors about spiritual ignorance or lack of readiness. “Day,” “light,” “sober,” “watch” are all metaphors about spiritual awareness and readiness.\n\n#### Armor\n\nHere, the apostles use a military metaphor to urge the Thessalonian church to be ready for Christ’s Second Coming at “the day of the Lord.” Just as soldiers must always be armed and ready to fight, so the Christian must live prepared for Christ’s return. Faithfulness and love are compared to a breastplate, and the hope of salvation is likened to a helmet [5:8](../05/08.md).\n\n#### Prophecy\n\nThose who “despise prophecies” in [5:20](../05/20.md) are said to “quench the Spirit.” This is a metaphor for trying to hinder the Holy Spirit’s guidance in the Church. All prophecies are to be examined and tested to determine if they adhere to apostolic teaching [5:21](../05/21.md). All prophecies that are proven to agree with apostolic teaching, are to be retained as good [5:21–22](../05/21/.md).\n\n### Submission to Christian leadership\n\nThe apostles link the well-being and spiritual safety of the Thessalonian church to obedience to their leaders. Christian leaders are to be given recognition and loving respect by the church [5:12–13](../05/12.md).\n\n### Holy Kiss\n\nThis refers to the ancient practice of exchanging a kiss of peace on the cheek during the liturgy. Different cultures have different standards of appropriate physical contact. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate this sensitive issue [5:26](../05/26.md). -5:1 i2vm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ δὲ τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 Here, **Now concerning** signals a change in subject (See also [4:9](../04/09.md)). This phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church about the timing of “the coming of the Lord” and how the church should prepare for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, about your question related to the exact timing of the Lord’s return” -5:1 a8f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 Here, **the times and the seasons** is an idiom referring to a specific point in time or a time period. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. This phrase could refer to: (1) a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “the appointed time when Jesus returns” or “the fixed time when Jesus returns” (See [Acts 1:7](acts/01/07.md)) for this exact phrase referring to the same thing)). (2) a specific amount of time. Alternate translation: “how long it will take for the Lord Jesus to return” or “when the Lord Jesus will return” -5:1 caue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε ὑμῖν γράφεσθαι 1 Here words are left out in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{for us}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. -5:2 yvg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile 0 This verse begins an extended list of contrasting similes that continues through [5:8](../05/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use equivalent comparisons or express these meanings plainly. -5:2 dqgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε 1 The words **For**, **yourselves**, and **perfectly** emphasize how clearly the Thessalonian church should understand when and how the Lord’s Second Coming will happen. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact, it is certain that you recognize accurately” or “You are certainly well aware of this fact” or “Indeed, you know precisely” -5:2 mcq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church has “no need that anything be written” to them about the timing and manner of the Lord’s Second Coming (See [5:1](../05/01.md)). Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Certainly,” -5:2 tu9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡμέρα Κυρίου 1 Here, **the day of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to the Old Testament concept of the time of God’s final judgment. The context of this passage makes it clear that **the day of the Lord** is synonymous with “the coming of the Lord” Jesus in [4:15](../04/15.md). (See also [Acts 2:20](../act/02/20.md); [1 Corinthians 5:5](../1co/05/05.md); [2 Thessalonians 2:2](../2th/02/02.md); [2 Peter 3:10](../2pe/03/10.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation; “the time when the Lord Jesus returns again to earth” or “the time when the Lord Jesus will finally judge” -5:2 tmj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 The point of this comparison is that, just like a thief at night comes unexpectedly, the way Jesus will return is unexpected and the timing of his return is unknown. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to come as unexpectedly as a robber at night” or “is going to come so surprisingly–like when a thief breaks in at night” or “is going to happen like this–all of a sudden” -5:3 p1wi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to express the suddenness of the “the day of the Lord.” Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Whenever they might say, ‘Everything is safe and sound,’” or “At a time when people are saying, ‘All is well,’” -5:3 mjvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast τότε 1 Here what follows the word **then** is in contrast to the **Peace and safety** these people expected to last. Instead, **sudden destruction comes** on them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. -5:3 ne9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τότε αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος 1 Here, **sudden destruction** parallels the idea of terror that accompanies a sudden attack by “a thief in the night” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). If it would be clearer in your language, you could make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “then sudden calamity strikes” or “then immediate destruction looms over them” -5:3 sde2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος, ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 Here, **sudden** describes the unexpected timing of **birth pains** , and **certainly not escape** describes the nature of **destruction**. Paul says similar things with these phrases to show that God’s final judgment will be a total surprise and complete ruin for unbelievers. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize these ideas. -5:3 f1xr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 The point of this comparison is that, just like a pregnant woman suddenly experiences labor pains, God’s final judgment will come suddenly and be inescapable. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as suddenly as labor pains seize a pregnant woman–these people can never escape God’s destruction” -5:3 iwc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ 1 Here, **having in the womb** is an idiom meaning “pregnant.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “do for a woman in late pregnancy” -5:3 undo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 Here, **certainly not** is a strong prohibition meaning “never” (See [4:15](../04/15.md)). If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “they will never escape” or “there is no way to possibly escape” -5:4 sk6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὑμεῖς δέ 1 Here what follows the words **But you** is in contrast to the “sudden destruction” of the people in [5:3](../05/03.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Certainly you” -5:4 b6lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει 1 Paul speaks of these people as if they actually live in place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **in darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “are not unprepared” or “are not living sinfully” -5:4 elp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “causing you to be like people such as those surprised by a robber. You are ready for the time when the Lord Jesus will return” -5:4 otz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἡμέρα 1 Here, Paul speaks about the idiom “the **day** of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md), by contrasting **the day** with **darkness**. He means that because the Thessalonian church is not unaware of “the **day** of the Lord,” they will not be unprepared, like people who live **in darkness**. If your readers would not understand what **the day** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “the day of the Lord” -5:4 ywez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 Paul speaks of “the **day** of the Lord” as if it were a thief who surprises a person. He means that “the **day** of the Lord” will come suddenly for those who are unprepared (See “sudden destruction” in [5:3](../05/03.md)). If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “making you unprepared, like when a robber breaks in at night” -5:5 ddce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Here, **sons of the light** means basically the same thing as **sons of the day**. Also, **of the night** means basically the same thing as **of the darkness**. The repetition is used to emphasize how **light** characterizes **day** and how **darkness** characterizes **night**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Certainly, all of you are ready for Christ’s Second Coming. None of us are unprepared” -5:5 zp3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as if the **light** and **day** were their physical parents. He means that the Thessalonian church members are God’s spiritual children who are characterized by spiritual readiness. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of the light and sons of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is because all of you who belong to God are ready for Christ’s coming” -5:5 ilv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church will escape God’s judgment on “the **day** of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” -5:5 cxo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντες & ὑμεῖς & ἐστε 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the whole Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “you Thessalonians are all” -5:5 d6fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Again, Paul speaks of these people as if they actually live in a place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See [5:4](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the night** or **of the darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We are not unprepared like those at night or those who live in the darkness, ” or “We are not characterized by being spiritually ignorant” or “We do not live like those who are characterized by sinful activities” -5:5 kq0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 In [5:5–10](../05/05.md), **We** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers in Christ are” -5:5 f4uw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe people who are characterized by spiritual ignorance or who live sinfully. This means that they will not be prepared at “**the day** of the Lord.” If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “characterized by being spiritually unprepared and living sinfully” -5:6 paqf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 Here, **so then** emphatically introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “as a result” -5:6 d2aj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί 1 Here Paul speaks about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” are if they are sleeping. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See notes for “darkness” at [5:4–5](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **sleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “let us not be like the rest of humanity, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” -5:6 on3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative μὴ καθεύδωμεν & γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 Here, the verb forms **sleep**, **keep watch**, and **be sober** could also refer to: (1) commands. Alternate translation: “we must not sleep … we must keep watch and be sober” (2) appeals. Alternate translation: “let us not sleep … let us keep watch and let us be sober” -5:6 x0zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποί 1 Paul is using the adjective **the rest** as a noun in order to describe those who are unprepared for Christ’s return. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like others who are not ready for the Lord Jesus to return” or “like the rest of humanity” -5:6 q33e rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, what follows the word **but** is in contrast to **the rest** who **sleep**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “On the contrary,” or “Instead,” or “Rather,” -5:6 sdww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 Here, Paul speaks of Christians as if they are watch guards. He means that they should be aware and be prepared for the Lord’s return by living as God’s people should live. If your readers would not understand what it means to **keep watch** or **be sober** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “instead, we must stay spiritually alert and prepared” -5:6 osxu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 These verbs express a similar idea by using two words connected with **and**. The verb **be sober** tells how Christians should **keep watch**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “we should remain calmly alert” or “let us remain soberly awake” -5:7 fxca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 These two phrases convey similar ideas by repeating the same verb forms twice. Paul says the same thing twice, in different ways, to show that **sleeping** and **getting drunk** are states of being that make people unaware or unprepared. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could condense each phrase. Alternate translation: “Certainly, people sleep at night, and people get drunk at night” -5:7 oyjo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should “not sleep” or be unprepared for the Lord’s return (See [5:6](../05/06.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact,” or “Certainly,” -5:7 s253 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν 1 Here again, like in [5:6](../05/06.md), Paul speaks as if these people are actually sleeping, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or even sinful (See also notes at [5:2,4](../05/02.md)). If your readers would not understand what **sleep** and **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Those who are sleeping are unaware” or “Certainly those who are asleep are unprepared” -5:7 exa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 Paul speaks as if these people are actually drunk, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or sinful. If your readers would not understand what **getting drunk** or **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are drunk are unprepared” or “those who are drunk are unaware” or “those who drink too much alcohol tend to drink at night” -5:8 wh3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to “getting drunk” at “night” in [5:7](../05/07.md). Instead, Christians are characterized by the activities of **the day** and staying **sober** (See [5:5–6](../05/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead” -5:8 iv63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἡμεῖς & νήφωμεν 1 Here, **should stay sober** could refer to: (1) a command. Alternate translation: “we … must stay sober” (2) an appeal. Alternate translation: “let us … stay sober” (See your translation at [5:6](../05/06.md)). -5:8 jqqo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 Paul speaks of Christians as if they are actually a part of the day time. He means that they are characterized by spiritual readiness for the Lord’s return. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Now, because we are ready for Christ’s coming, we” or “Since we are characterized by being ready, we” -5:8 ev6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 Paul speaks of Christians as if they are soldiers. He means that just as a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so Christians must prepare themselves for the Second Coming of Christ with the spiritual protection of **faith**, **love**, and **hope** (See also [Ephesians 6:10–18,23](../eph/06/10.md)). If your readers would not understand what these phrases mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. -5:8 l89q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης & σωτηρίας 1 Paul uses the possessive form to describe things that are characterized by **faith** and **hope** and **love**. You could turn these phrases into similes if it would be clearer in your language. -5:9 h5y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅτι οὐκ ἔθετο ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ὀργὴν 1 Here, **wrath** refers to God’s future and final Judgment (See your translation of **wrath** at [1:10](../01/10/.md), [2:16](../02/16/.md)). (See also [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)). If your language does not use the abstract noun **wrath**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. “Certainly, God did not destine that he would punish us” or “Indeed, God did not determine that he would judge us” -5:9 lrx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should have “the hope of salvation” (See [5:8](../05/08.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly” -5:9 erz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς & εἰς 1 Here, **to … to** introduces two purpose clauses. Paul is stating the purpose or goal for which God **appointed** the two types of people described in [5:3–8](../05/03.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … in order to” -5:9 qmo5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to **wrath**. Here Paul emphasizes that God’s true people will not experience his final punishment. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but actually” or “but instead” -5:9 qfcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrase translated **to obtain salvation** is a possessive form that Paul uses to indicate that **salvation** is something that belongs to God’s people. If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “for the possessing of salvation” or “for the acquiring of salvation” -5:10 arhm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ ἀποθανόντος περὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **the one having died for us** gives us further information about what “salvation through our Lord Jesus Christ” is (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Paul means that God gives the guarantee that Christians will “obtain salvation,” because Jesus **died for us**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who died on our behalf” or “who died for our sake” -5:10 dzq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα & ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν 1 This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating why Jesus **died for us**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that … we could live together with him” -5:10 w59c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 Paul speaks of these people as if they were physically **awake or asleep**. He means that they are “alive or dead” (See [4:14–17](../04/14.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **awake or asleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whether we are living or even if we are dead” -5:11 r921 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 Here, **Therefore** indicates the conclusion of this section about timing of “the day of the Lord,” and connects to the manner of Christ’s return in [4:14–18](../04/14.md) by again using the same phrase, **comfort one another**. -5:11 o85i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ παρακαλεῖτε 1 **Therefore** begins a result clause. Paul explains how the Thessalonian church should respond to the fact that Jesus died so that Christians can “obtain salvation” (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Alternate translation: “This is why you should encourage” or “As a result, you must comfort” -5:11 m2c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet διὸ παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much Paul wants the Thessalonian church to encourage and support each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “As a result, continue to be supportive of what each person needs” or “This is why you must supportively console each other with this message” -5:11 hepx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε & οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 These verbs are imperatives but could communicate an appeal rather than a command. You could use a form in your language that communicates an urgent request or appeal. Alternate translation: “we apostles urge you to comfort … build up” -5:11 fx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as if they were a building that can be constructed. He means that they should mutually support one another in the Christian life. If your readers would not understand what it means to **build up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “keep supporting” or “continue to confirm” -5:11 kdae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 Here, the term **one the one** is an idiom meaning “each and every one” or “each one.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “each one” or “one another” -5:11 sfv4 καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε 1 Here Paul uses the emphatic phrase **just as also you are doing** to encourage the Thessalonian church to continue their practice of mutually supporting each other. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “exactly as you have been doing” -5:12 pd47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **Now** indicates that what follows is the final section of instructions from the apostles. Alternate translation: “Lastly” or “Indeed” -5:12 fqh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 This clause expresses different functions for the same group of leaders. It is not making a distinction between **the ones laboring among you** and **leading you** and **admonishing you**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “your leaders who are working among you and guiding you in the Lord and training you” -5:12 f4jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Paul speaks as if the leaders of the church at Thessalonica were occupying space inside of **the Lord**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that these men represent Jesus himself in their leadership role in the Thessalonian church (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” -5:13 jq0o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because of their work on your behalf, we also ask you to lovingly show them the utmost consideration” or “and since they work so hard for you, we also urge you to show them the highest honor out of love” -5:13 p6m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 Paul speaks as if the Thessalonian church is occupying space inside of **love**. He is describing how they should show honor to their leaders. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Here, **in love** could refer to: (1) the means of love. Alternate translation: “by loving them” (2) the basis for love. Alternate translation: “on the basis of your love for them” -5:13 rqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 Here is the first of 17 final appeals in [5:13–26](../05/13.md) that the apostles give the Thessalonian church. **Be at peace** is an imperative, but here it could be an urgent request rather than a command. Use a natural way in your language to communicate an appeal or urgent request. Alternate translation: “We urge you to continue to live peacefully with your leaders” -5:14 lajk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany 0 Paul uses a repetitive series of imperative sentences in [5:14–22](../05/14) to urge the Thessalonian church to show practical love to one another. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone should do. -5:14 tdxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 This phrase signals the apostles’ final appeals to the Thessalonian church. Since there are 14 commands in this section [5:14–22](../05/14.md), you could use a marker from your language to indicate this final section. Alternate translation: “Finally, we urge you, fellow believers in Christ” -5:14 qadb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Here the idiom **brothers** could refer to: (1) the whole Thessalonian church including the leaders. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers in Christ” (2) the leaders of the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “fellow leaders of Christ’s church” -5:14 g34k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πρὸς πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “toward all your fellow believers in Christ” or “with the whole Thessalonian church” -5:15 vlp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁρᾶτε 1 Here, **See that** is an idiom used to command attention. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Be certain that” -5:15 dqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ 1 Paul speaks of **evil** as if it were goods or money that could be exchanged. He means that if a someone treats you badly, you should not respond in the same way. If your readers would not understand what it means to **pay back evil for evil** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “treats anyone wrongly because they treated you wrongly” -5:15 oz10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here what follows the word **but** is in contrast to repaying **evil for evil**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “and instead,” -5:15 mc2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 Here, **always** could be using exaggeration to express emphasis. Paul means that the Thessalonian church should make it a habit to **pursue what is good**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “make every effort to” or “constantly” or “habitually” -5:15 pe3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism καὶ εἰς ἀλλήλους καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 Here, **both for one another and for all** is used to emphasize groups of people. In this context, the phrase could refer to: (1) the Thessalonian church and all believers in Christ. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “for your church at Thessalonica and for all believers in Christ” (2) the Thessalonian church and the whole human race (See how you translated this phrase in [3:12](../03/12.md)). Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “for everyone” or “for each and every person” -5:15 i0jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντας 1 Paul could be using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Here it could refer to: (1) all Christians. Alternate translation: “all your fellow believers in Christ” (2) the whole human race. Alternate translation: “all humanity” -5:16 chw9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 Here, **always** could be using exaggeration to express emphasis. Paul could mean that the Thessalonian church should make it a habit to **rejoice**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “constantly” or “habitually” -5:17 l63i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως προσεύχεσθε 1 Here, **without ceasing** could be using exaggeration to express emphasis. Paul could mean that the Thessalonian church should make it a habit to **Pray**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Continue to pray” or “Keep praying regularly” or “Retain a prayerful state of mind” -5:18 bt5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐν παντὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **everything** as a noun in order to describe a situation or time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Here, **In everything** could refer to: (1) a situation or circumstance. Alternate translation: “In every circumstance” or “No matter what happens” (2) time. Alternate translation: “At every time” or “At every moment” (3) both a situation and time. Alternate translation: “In every circumstance and moment” -5:18 x2jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε; 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Continue to give thanks in everything” or “Keep giving thanks all the time” -5:18 q7gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε; τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **for** begins a reason clause. Paul is telling the Thessalonian church the reason why they should “rejoice,” “pray,” and **give thanks** in [5:16–18](../05/16.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Give thanks in everything, because all these things are what God desires for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “Because this is God’s will for you who are united to Christ Jesus, you must give thanks in everything” -5:18 l3sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that could refer to: (1) all the commands in [5:14–18](../05/14.md) Alternate translation: “because all these things are what God desires” (2) **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “for in fact, this is God’s will” or “for certainly, this thing is God’s will” -5:18 yu36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τοῦτο 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is” -5:18 sw8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **the will of God in Christ Jesus for you**, you can express the idea it in another way. Alternate translation: “how God desires people to live who are united to Christ Jesus” -5:18 mbz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, Paul speaks of **the will of God** as though it were occupying space inside **Christ Jesus**. This metaphor means that the way God desires his people to live is inseparable from being united to **Christ Jesus** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “for those of you who are united to Jesus Christ” or “for all of you who share life with Jesus Christ” -5:19 j1ei rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Paul speaks of **the** Holy **Spirit** as if he is fire that can be extinguished. Paul means that the Thessalonian church must not hinder the work of the Holy **Spirit**, especially by despising prophecies (See [5:20](../05/20.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **quench** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not extinguish the Spirit” or “Do not reject the Spirit” -5:19 sv8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Continue to kindle” or “Be fervent in” or “Keep working along with” -5:20 iv1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Readily accept” or “Cherish” -5:20 rrza rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism προφητείας μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 The two phrases in [5:19–20](../05/19.md) could refer to the same thing. Paul could be saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to correct how the Thessalonian church viewed prophecy. He means that the Holy Spirit is the source of true prophecy (See [2 Peter 1:21](2pet/01/21.md)), so they should not “quench the Spirit” by rejecting all prophecies. You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Do not continue to despise prophetic messages from the Holy Spirit” -5:21 ihzh πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is beginning a general list of things that the Thessalonians should **Test** and **Hold fast** if they are **good**. (2) Paul is continuing to refer to the prophesies in the previous verse, and he wants the Thessalonians to **Test** those and **Hold fast** to the prophesies that are truly from God. -5:21 wx69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians could make **all things** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” -5:21 sjh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Here, **all things** is an adjectival phrase. Depending on whether you decided this is a new list or a continuation of verse 20, this could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “everything you hear and do” (2) Alternate translation: “all prophesies” -5:21 n1jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Paul speaks of **good** things as if they were objects that someone could hold tightly in his hands. He means that the Thessalonian church should only believe and practice things that prove to be from the Holy Spirit. If your readers would not understand what it means to **hold fast to what {is} good** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Keep only the valid things” or “Retain what is from the Spirit” -5:21 jska rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸ καλὸν 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is good” -5:22 z9k0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Here, **evil** is spoken of as though it were a person who could be seen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “anything clearly wicked” or “all that is obviously evil” -5:23 mqi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι 1 Here, the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer (See also [3:11–13](../03/11.md)). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that God himself, who gives peace, would sanctify” -5:23 ozyh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως & τηρηθείη 1 These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how much he wants God to preserve the Thessalonian church as his people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “may … fully preserve you as his people to the end, and may every part of you be protected” or “may … completely preserve each and every one of you” -5:23 sbxc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form **the God of peace**, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (See Romans 15:33; 16:20; Philippians 4:9; Hebrews 13:20). If this is not clear in your language, you could make it explicit. In this context, **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (2) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (3) Both. -5:23 nb1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 Paul uses the word **himself** to emphasize the urgency of the apostles’ prayer or blessing by drawing attention to **God**, who is the only one who can sanctify and keep the Christian person blameless. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. -5:23 vkhs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως & τηρηθείη. 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **be kept** with an active form, and you could emphasize who did the action. Alternate translation: “may God keep you completely blameless” or “may God make your whole life sinless” -5:23 s36k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Paul speaks, using these three aspects of the human person in order to represent the whole human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your whole being” or “your whole life” -5:23 nyma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:15](../04/15.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” in [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth again” or “at the arrival of our Lord Jesus Christ” -5:24 i03k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 Here, **who will also do it** expresses the result of God’s faithfulness. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Because God is faithful, he will also preserve you sanctified” or “Since God is trustworthy, he will also completely sanctify you” -5:24 vx20 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς 1 Here it is implied that **he** refers to “the God of peace” in [5:23](../05/23.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Faithful is God who calls you” or “The God who continues to summon you is faithful” -5:24 lg3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πιστὸς ὁ 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. -5:24 c3jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 The pronouns **he** and **who** refer to “the God of peace” in [5:23](../05/23.md). Use a natural way in your language to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “is God who calls you, so he will also do it” -5:24 pa1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πιστὸς ὁ 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. -5:25 b7w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative προσεύχεσθε καὶ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **pray** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request or appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request or appeal. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clearer. Alternate translation: “we ask you to pray” or “please pray for us” -5:25 tbhj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **us** refers exclusively to the apostles. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “us apostles” -5:26 j46q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀσπάσασθε 1 Here, **Greet** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Make it your habit to greet” or “Make it your practice to greet” -5:26 dwl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς πάντας 1 Here, **all the brothers** is an idiom that refers to the whole Thessalonian church–and by extension–all Christians. Alternate translation: “all believers in Christ” or “all Christians” -5:26 v9iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐν φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 This action was an expression of Christian affection in this culture. It showed the unity of those who belong to Christ. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. -5:27 xn0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula ἐνορκίζω ὑμᾶς τὸν Κύριον, ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 The phrase **I solemnly charge you {by} the Lord** is an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “You must make a vow to the Lord that you will read this letter” or “I put you under oath to the Lord that this letter must be read” -5:27 n5cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 It is assumed that this letter would be read out loud by someone in the local church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to have this letter read aloud” -5:27 yp7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to make sure you read this letter out loud” -5:27 mtvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πᾶσιν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Here, **all the brothers** is an idiom that refers to the whole Thessalonian church–and by extension–all Christians (See [5:26](../05/26.md). Alternate translation: “to the whole church at Thessalonica” -5:28 ykkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 This is a blessing and greeting formula. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing that could be used as a greeting in your language. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ show you how kind he is” or “May the favor of the Lord Jesus Christ be among you all” or “I pray that the Lord Jesus Christ will favor all of you” -5:28 n8ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **grace**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ always show you how kind he is” -5:28 d35d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Many ancient manuscripts add “Amen” +4:14 ybz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν 1 Here, the word **we** includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +4:14 tfzg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέστη 1 Here, the word **rose** refers to how Jesus came back to life after he **died**. If your language does not use **rose** to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “came back to life” or “lived again” +4:14 kmk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὁ Θεὸς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we believe that thus also God” +4:14 wr6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὕτως καὶ ὁ Θεὸς 1 The phrase **thus also** could go with: (1) **God will bring**. In this case, **thus also** indicates that believers will experience something that is similar to how Jesus died and rose again. Alternate translation: “we can also believe that, in a similar way, God” (2) the implied phrase “we believe.” In this case, **thus also** indicates that believing that Christians will resurrect is based on believing in Jesus’ resurrection. Alternate translation: “thus also we believe that God” +4:14 qehi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul does not explicitly state all the elements in his comparison between **Jesus** and the **the ones having slept**. He states that Jesus **died and rose**, and he implies that this will be true for **the ones having slept**. He states that **the ones having slept** will be brought **with** Jesus, and he implies that Jesus is coming back to this world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these two implicit ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “God will raise the ones having slept through Jesus and will bring them with him when he comes back” +4:14 skuw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄξει 1 Here, the phrase **will bring** could mean that: (1) God will send resurrected believers with Jesus when Jesus comes back to this world. Alternate translation: “will send back to earth” (2) God will bring resurrected believers to be with Jesus in heaven. Alternate translation: “will bring to heaven” +4:14 m1fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “the ones having passed away” or “the ones who are dead” +4:14 tkhu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **through Jesus** could go with: (1) **will bring**. In this case, God acts through **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “through Jesus God will bring with him the ones having slept” (2) **having slept**. In this case, Paul is describing people who died while they were believing in **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “God will bring with him the ones having slept in Jesus” or “God will bring with him the believers who have slept” +4:14 tjqj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to **Jesus**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use the person’s name here. Alternate translation: “with Jesus” +4:15 vvda rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about believers who have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Indeed,” +4:15 cbk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο & ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul introduces with the word **that**. This form emphasizes what Paul is about to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “we say to you in a word of the Lord that” or “here is what we say to you in a word of the Lord:” +4:15 fdwk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λέγομεν & ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 Here, the word **we** in the phrase **we say** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. However, the word **we** in the phrase **we, the ones living** does include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. +4:15 ni3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean a message that is shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a message” or “words” +4:15 wpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that could be: (1) something that **the Lord** said. Alternate translation: “a word from the Lord” or “a word spoken by the Lord” (2) authorized by **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “a word that the Lord approves” or “a word that has the Lord’s authority” +4:15 hdlr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες, οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 Here, the phrases **the ones living** and **the ones surviving** distinguish **we** from other people. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “we, by which I mean those of us who live, who survive” +4:15 gbe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, the phrase **the coming of the Lord** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “until when the Lord comes back to earth” or “to the return of our Lord to us” +4:15 xd2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν 1 The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “will by no means go before” +4:15 b786 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν 1 Here, the phrase **will certainly not go before** indicates that people who are alive when Jesus comes back will not meet him first. Instead, believers who have died will meet him first, and then believers who are alive will meet him. Paul explains this further in the following verse (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “will certainly not go to Jesus before” or “will certainly not be with Jesus before” +4:15 km0g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:13–14](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “the ones having passed away” or “the ones who are dead” +4:16 ah7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an elaboration or explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about how living believers will not “go before” dead believers (see [4:15](../04/15.md)). This explanation continues in [4:17](../04/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an elaboration or explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is what I mean:” or “More specifically,” +4:16 ygfp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun “him,” which is already implied in the verbal phrase **will come down**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **himself**. Alternate translation: “it is the Lord who” or “as for the Lord, he” +4:16 c26b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul provides a list with three items. This list might refer to: (1) three different actions that all make sounds. Alternate translation: “with a loud command, the voice of an archangel, and a trumpet of God” (2) one action, the **loud command**. This **command** is made up of the **voice of an archangel** and the **trumpet of God**. Alternate translation: “with a loud command given by the voice of an archangel and by a trumpet of God” (3) two different actions, the **loud command** and the **voice of an archangel**, and the **archangel** uses **a trumpet of God**. Alternate translation: “with a loud command and with the voice of an archangel who uses a trumpet of God” +4:16 z9ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν κελεύσματι 1 Here Paul does not specify who gives the **loud command**. He implies that it is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with a loud command from God” +4:16 breq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a trumpet** that is related to **God**. More specifically, the **trumpet** could: (1) be one that **God** commands to be blown. Alternate translation: “a trumpet that God has someone blow” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s trumpet” +4:16 k7sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 2 Here, the word **and** introduces an event that comes after the previously described events. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase introduces the next event in a sequence. Alternate translation: “and then” or “and after that” +4:16 dr89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ νεκροὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to believers who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” +4:16 xrxu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that Paul is speaking only about **the dead** who are united to Christ, that is, believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking about believers who have died. Alternate translation: “Christians” or “who believed in Christ” +4:16 xbvx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστήσονται 1 Here, the word **rise** refers to people who had died then coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will be restored to life” or “will resurrect” +4:16 q6s9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρῶτον 1 Here, the word **first** indicates that, after Jesus comes down from heaven, **the dead in Christ** will resurrect before anything else happens. Paul indicates in the following verse what happens after they resurrect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “before anything else happens” or “immediately afterwards” +4:17 iy00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 Here, the word **Then** indicates that what Paul is about to describe will only happen after the events he described in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces the next event in a sequence. Alternate translation: “Next,” or “Afterward,” +4:17 pknb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες, οἱ περιλειπόμενοι ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς, ἁρπαγησόμεθα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God will catch us, the ones living, the ones surviving, up together with them” +4:17 l5l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & πάντοτε & ἐσόμεθα 1 By **we** in both clauses, Paul includes himself, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +4:17 fc63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες, οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 Here, the phrases **the ones living** and **the ones surviving** distinguish **we** from other people. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. See how you translated the similar phrases in [4:15](../04/15.md). Alternate translation: “we, by which I mean those of us who live, who survive” +4:17 otiq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to “the dead in Christ” who resurrect. Paul mentioned them in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the referent more explicit. Alternate translation: “the resurrected believers” or “the dead who live again” +4:17 m3gb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν νεφέλαις 1 Here, the phrase **in the clouds** could refer to: (1) the place where believers meet the Lord. In other words, the **clouds** are in the **air**, which is where believers **meet the Lord**. Alternate translation: “up among the clouds” (2) the means by which believers go to meet the Lord. In this case, the **clouds** are what believers stand on as they go to meet the Lord. Some people in Paul’s culture told stories about people standing on clouds as they traveled to heaven. Alternate translation: “on the clouds” or “by means of clouds” +4:17 o7lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 Here, the phrase **to meet** refers to going to greet someone. Paul could be implying that, after believers greet him, Jesus: (1) continues to earth with all believers. Alternate translation: “to meet the Lord in the air and return to earth with him” (2) goes back up to heaven with all believers, either temporarily or eternally. Alternate translation: “to meet the Lord in the air and go back to heaven with him” +4:17 buz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ἀέρα 1 Here, the phrase **in the air** refers to the area above the earth but below heaven, an area often called the sky. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this area. Alternate translation: “above the earth” or “up in the atmosphere” +4:17 ouvu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, the phrase **in this way** refers to the process that Paul has outlined in this verse and the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result of a process. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “after all those events” +4:18 gt91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces what Paul wants the Thessalonians to do in response to what he has told them about Jesus’ second coming and the resurrection of dead believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the application of a specific teaching. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Now that I have taught you these things” +4:18 xsus rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 Here, the phrase **these words** refers to what Paul has said in [4:13–17](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers back to this entire section. Alternate translation: “with all these things that I have taught you” or “with the message I have spoken” +5:intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n9. Teaching on the day of the Lord (4:13–5:11)\n * The timing of the day of the Lord (5:1–11)\n10. Final Commands (5:11–22)\n11. Closing (5:23–28)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The timing of the Lord’s coming\n\nIn [4:13–18](../04/13.md), Paul taught the Thessalonians about what will happen to believers who die before Jesus comes back. In [5:1–11](../05/01.md), he teaches them about how the timing of Jesus’ return should impact how they live now. In these verses, he informs the Thessalonians that Jesus’ second coming will surprise people. Scholars debate whether Paul meant that it would surprise everyone or just people who do not believe. Most likely, Paul meant that no one can know for sure when Jesus will return, but believers will be ready for it while unbelievers will not be ready for it. Paul then explains what the Thessalonians should do to be ready for Jesus’ return: they should “put on” faith, hope, and love (see [5:8](../05/08.md)).\n\n### The Spirit and prophecies\n\nIn [5:19–20](../05/19.md), Paul warns the Thessalonians against “quenching” the Holy Spirit and despising prophecies. Most likely, the commands in the next two verses also relate to prophecies (see [5:21–22](../05/21.md)): the Thessalonians should test all prophecies, hold to those that are right, and avoid those that are wrong. So, Paul wants them to respect all prophecies, since true prophecy comes from the Holy Spirit. However, he also wants them to test prophecies to make sure they really do come from the Holy Spirit. These verses are very short and imply some information, so you may need to make some of these ideas more explicit. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Thief similes\n\nIn [5:2](../05/02.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md), Paul compares Jesus’ second coming to what thieves do and experience. In [5:2](../05/02.md), Paul indicates that Jesus’ second coming will be surprising, just as a thief breaking into a house is surprising. In [5:4](../05/04.md), ancient manuscripts differ in how they express the simile. The reading that the ULT follows indicates that Jesus’ second coming will surprise people who are doing what is wrong, just like the daylight surprises thieves who are breaking into a house. The reading that the ULT mentions in a footnote indicates that Jesus’ second coming is surprising, just as a thief breaking into a house is surprising. With these similes, Paul compares Jesus’ second coming to what thieves do and experience to indicate that Jesus’ second coming will surprise people. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Birth pain simile\n\nIn [5:3](../05/03.md), Paul compares Jesus’ second coming to the birth pains that a woman experiences during labor. Just as these birth pains come suddenly and cannot be avoided, so Jesus’ second coming will come suddenly, and unbelievers will not be able to escape from Jesus’ judgment. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Day and night, light and darkness\n\nThroughout [5:1–11](../05/01.md), Paul refers to day and light in contrast to night and darkness. In [5:2](../05/02.md) Paul uses the word “day” in the phrase “the day of the Lord.” In the following verses, he develops the imagery of day and night so that it connects with the idea of the “day of the Lord.” He speaks of people who live in the “day” and in the “light,” which figuratively describes people who know that Jesus is coming back and who live properly and obey God. These people will not be surprised or judged on the “day of the Lord,” since they are “of day.” On the other hand, Paul speaks of people who live in the “night” and in the “darkness,” which figuratively describes people who do not expect Jesus to come back and who live sinfully and disobey God. These people will be surprised and judged on the “day of the Lord,” since they are not “of day.” So, people who want to avoid being judged on “the day of Lord” must live as people “of day,” that is, as obedient and watchful people. Since Paul’s day and night metaphor is directed related to the phrase “the day of the Lord,” preserve the language of day and night if possible. See the notes on these verses for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Putting on armor\n\nIn [5:8](../05/08.md), Paul commands the Thessalonians to put on armor, specifically a “breastplate” and a “helmet.” A “breastplate” is armor that protects the vital organs, including the heart and lungs. Paul identifies the “breastplate” with faith and love. A “helmet” is armor that protects the head. Paul identifies the “helmet” with hope. It is unlikely that Paul expected the Thessalonians to interpret these two specific pieces of armor in special ways. Rather, Paul wants the Thessalonians to think about faith, love, and hope as if they were pieces of armor that protect them from evil powers, including sin and the devil. Since Paul uses similar armor metaphors in other letters, preserve the armor language if possible. See the notes on these verses for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n#### Quenching the Holy Spirit\n\nIn [5:19](../05/19.md), Paul refers to hindering the Holy Spirit as if it were “quenching” a fire. Other passages in the Bible connect the Holy Spirit with fire (for example, see [Acts 2:1–4](../act/02/01.md)), so if possible preserve the metaphor or express the idea as a simile. See the notes on this verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:1 i2vm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +5:1 y4cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 Here Paul implies that **the times and the seasons** relate to questions concerning when Jesus will come back. In other words, Paul has begun to talk about the timing of Jesus’ second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the times and the seasons after which Jesus will return” or “the times and the seasons related to Jesus’ second coming” +5:1 a8f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 The terms **times** and **seasons** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together to refer in general to the timing of Jesus’ second coming. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the precise time” or “the periods of time” +5:1 caue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμῖν γράφεσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “for us to write anything to you” +5:2 mcq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians “have no need for anything to be written” to them about the timing of Jesus’ second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Indeed,” +5:2 dqgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “as for you, you know perfectly well” or “it is you who know perfectly well” +5:2 rss4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἔρχεται 1 Here, Paul speaks of **the day of the Lord** as if it were a person who could come to a place. He means that the event named **the day of the Lord** will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will happen” or “occurs” +5:2 tmj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 Paul is saying that **the day of the Lord** is like **a thief in the night** because people cannot tell when either one will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “comes in this manner—unexpectedly, as a thief comes unexpectedly in the night” or “comes when people are not looking for it, just as thief steals in the night when people are not looking” +5:2 yvg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ὡς & οὕτως 1 Having both terms **in this manner** and **as** in this sentence may be redundant in your language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as” +5:3 tbsh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια, τότε αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος 1 Here Paul uses the present tense forms **say** and **comes** to refer to something that will happen in the future. He uses the present tense to indicate that these things will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Whenever they will be saying, ‘Peace and safety,’ then sudden destruction will come on them” +5:3 p1wi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια, τότε αἰφνίδιος & ὄλεθρος 1 Here, the word **Whenever** introduces something that is happening when the **sudden destruction comes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that describes things that happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “While they are saying, ‘Peace and safety,’ sudden destruction” or “They will be saying, ‘Peace and safety,’ but then sudden destruction” +5:3 xzxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια, τότε 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they say that there is peace and safety, then” +5:3 wqgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λέγωσιν & αὐτοῖς & οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 Here, the pronouns **they**, **them**, and **they** refer to every person who is not a believer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “unbelievers say … on them … they will certainly not escape” +5:3 mjvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Peace** and **safety**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “We are peaceful and safe” or “We live peacefully and safely” +5:3 ne9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος, ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they will suddenly be destroyed, just as the birth pain comes to the one” +5:3 bw2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὄλεθρος 1 Here, the word **destruction** refers to severe suffering or punishment. It does not mean that they people who experience the **destruction** cease to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “ruin” or “disaster” +5:3 f1xr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 Paul is saying that **sudden destruction** during the day of the Lord is like **birth pain** because both events begin suddenly and cannot be avoided. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as the birth pain comes suddenly on the one having in the womb, and just as she cannot escape from the birth pain, so they will certainly not escape the destruction” +5:3 iwc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ 1 Here, the phrase **the one having in the womb** refers to a woman who is pregnant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to a woman with child” or “to a woman who is pregnant” +5:3 undo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “they will by no means escape” +5:4 sk6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὑμεῖς δέ, ἀδελφοί & ἐστὲ 1 Here, the phrase **But you** introduces what is true about the Thessalonians in contrast to what Paul has said about unbelievers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that contrasts the Thessalonians with unbelievers. Alternate translation: “However, as for you, brothers, you are” or “In contrast, brothers, you are” +5:4 b6lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians are not in a place that has no light. He could mean that: (1) they are not ignorant about the day of the Lord. Alternate translation: “are not ignorant” or “know about these things” (2) they are not avoiding and disobeying God. Alternate translation: “are not disobeying God” or “are not far away from God” +5:4 fdiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν σκότει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in dark places” or “without the light” +5:4 elp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification καταλάβῃ 1 Here, Paul speaks of **the day** as if it were a person who could **overtake** the Thessalonians. He means that the event named **the day** will not surprise or shock the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might surprise” or “might startle” +5:4 ywez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 Paul is saying that **the day** of the Lord will **overtake** some people as sunshine overtakes **thieves** because both the people and the thieves are surprised by and unprepared for the **day** to arrive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the day might overtake you as daytime overtakes thieves while they are stealing” or “you are unprepared for the day as thieves are unprepared for the sun to rise” +5:4 otz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ἡμέρα 1 Here Paul is again referring to what he called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). Make sure that your readers recognize that this is the same **day**, and express the idea as you did in [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus’ second coming” or “the time when Jesus comes back” +5:4 o2ja rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς κλέπτας 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “as daylight overtakes thieves” +5:4 iap8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὡς κλέπτας 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **as thieves**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “as a thief.” This reading would mean that the **day** overtakes some people **as a thief** overtakes people and steals from them. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +5:5 ilv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason or basis for what Paul has said about how the “day” will not overtake the Thessalonians (see [5:2](../05/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is true because” +5:5 ddce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πάντες & ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Here, the phrases **sons of the light** and **sons of day** mean basically the same thing. Also, the phrases **of night** and **of darkness** mean basically the same thing. Paul is using these phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis by using a single phrase in each sentence. Alternate translation: “you are all sons of the day. We are not of night” or “you are all sons of the bright day. We are not of the dark night” +5:5 zp3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πάντες & ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 The expression **son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something. Paul is using this expression to describe the behavior and character of the Thessalonians, since they are people who are characterized by **light** and **day**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are all characterized by light and characterized by day” or “you all belong to the light and belong to the day” +5:5 o01o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντες & ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here Paul speaks of the Thessalonians as if they were characterized by **light** and **day** (see the previous note for the meaning of the phrase **son of**). He means that they obey God and do what is right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are all people who obey God and do what is right” +5:5 cxo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations υἱοὶ φωτός & καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “children of light and children of day” +5:5 f4uw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **We** are not characterized by **night** or **darkness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “We are not characterized by night nor characterized by darkness” or “We do not belong to the night nor do we belong to the darkness” +5:5 d6fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Here Paul speaks of believers as those who are not characterized by **night** and **darkness** (see the previous note for the meaning of the phrases **of night** and **of darkness**). He means that believers are not people who disobey God and do what is wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are not people who disobey God and do what is wrong” +5:5 kq0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 Here, the word **We** includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:5 h4fd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of dark places” or “without light” +5:6 paqf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 Here, the phrase **So then** introduces what Paul wants believers to do in response to what he has said about Jesus’ second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the application of a specific teaching. Alternate translation: “Because those things are true” or “Now that I have taught you these things” +5:6 y36l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive μὴ καθεύδωμεν & γρηγορῶμεν 1 Here, both times Paul uses the word **us**, it includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. +5:6 d2aj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν 1 Here Paul speaks about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” as if they were sleeping. He means that they are unaware of or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us not behave sinfully and ignorantly” or “let us not act as if the Lord is not coming” +5:6 x0zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποί 1 Paul is using the adjective **rest** as a noun to refer to a group of people that includes everyone who does not believe. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the rest of people” or “everyone else” +5:6 qylm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ λοιποί 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the rest sleep” +5:6 sdww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 Here, Paul speaks as if believers were guards who needed to **keep watch and be sober**. He means that believers should be aware of and prepared for the Lord’s return, and they should be self-controlled so that they live in a way that pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us be spiritually alert and self-controlled” or “let us confidently expect the Lord to return and live in a way that pleases God” +5:7 oyjo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of the contrast between night and day (see [5:8](../05/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As you know,” +5:7 fxca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οἱ & καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 Here Paul provides two parallel examples of what people do **at night**. He repeats the same structure and the phrase **at night** in both clauses, which emphasizes **at night**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two examples into one clause and emphasize **at night** in another way. Alternate translation: “it is at night that people sleep and drunkards get drunk” or “the ones sleeping and the ones getting drunk do so during the night” +5:7 s253 οἱ & καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 Here Paul provides common examples of what people sometimes do during the **night**. He is not using **sleeping** and **getting drunk** to speak about something else. If it would be helpful in your language, you make it clearer that Paul is providing examples from regular life. Alternate translation: “here are some things that people often do at night: they sleep, or they get drunk” +5:8 wh3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the people who “sleep” and “get drunk” during the night (see [5:7](../05/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “Unlike them,” +5:8 qf05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **us** includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:8 yn0c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 Here, the phrase **being of day** provides a reason why the Thessalonians should **be sober**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because we are of day” +5:8 jqqo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **of day** means basically the same thing as the phrase “sons of day” in [5:5](../05/05.md). Paul means that believers obey God and do what is right, just as people usually do what is right during the **day**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people who obey God and do what is right” +5:8 kisa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες, νήφωμεν 1 Here, the phrase **be sober** contrasts with the phrase “get drunk” in the previous verse ([5:7](../05/07.md)). Paul means that believers should be self-controlled and obedient to God. He does not just mean that they should not get drunk, although that is part of the command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “But let us, being of day, not get drunk but be self-controlled” +5:8 ev6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 Here Paul speaks of Christians acting in **faith** and **love** as if each of them were a soldier putting on a **breastplate**. He speaks of Christians experiencing **the hope of salvation** as if each of them were a soldier putting on a **helmet**. He means that **faith**, **love**, and **hope** protect believers, just as armor protects soldiers. Paul does not directly state what believers are protected from, but he implies that it is sin and evil powers, including the devil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acting in faith and love as if they were a breastplate you could put on, and having the hope of salvation as if it were a helmet you would wear” or “protecting yourselves by acting in faith and love and by having the hope of salvation” +5:8 o2ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **love**, **hope**, and **salvation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the breastplate, which stands for believing God and loving people, and a helmet, which stands for hoping that God will save us” +5:8 l89q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to define **the breastplate** as **faith** and **love**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a breastplate, which is faith and love” or “the breastplate that is faith and love” +5:8 iuhj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown περικεφαλαίαν 1 A **helmet** is a strong hat that a soldier would wear to protect his or her head. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of armor, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a protective hat” or “something to protect our heads” +5:8 bz9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **hope** that is focused on **salvation**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the hope for salvation” or “the hope that expects salvation” +5:9 lrx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should do what Paul has commanded them to do in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the reason or basis for previous commands. Alternate translation: “You should do those things because” or “I urge you to do those things since” +5:9 s2ow rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **us** and **our** include Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. +5:9 erz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ὀργὴν 1 Here, the word **wrath** refers to how God will punish people who do not believe and who disobey him. This punishment will occur during “the day of the Lord” that Paul has already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for future punishment” or “to experience punishment when Jesus returns” +5:9 h5y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὀργὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be punished” +5:9 qmo5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ εἰς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but he appointed us for” +5:9 qfcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **obtaining** something, which is **salvation**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for obtaining salvation” or “to obtain salvation” +5:9 ynwa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be saved” +5:10 arhm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ ἀποθανόντος περὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **the one having died for us** gives more information about “our Lord Jesus Christ.” It does not distinguish between several Christs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that adds information instead of making distinctions. Alternate translation: “and he is the one who died for us” or “who died for us” +5:10 usg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & γρηγορῶμεν & ζήσωμεν 1 Here, the words **us**, **we**, and **we** include Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. +5:10 qv56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **for us** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help us. Alternate translation: “for our benefit” (2) instead of or in place of us. Alternate translation: “in place of us” or “instead of us” +5:10 dzq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus **died**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” +5:10 w59c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 Here Paul could be using the terms **keep watch** and **sleep** to refer to: (1) being alive and being dead. Alternate translation: “whether we are alive or die” (2) waiting expectantly for Jesus to return and being dead. Alternate translation: “whether we continue to expect Jesus to return or have died” (3) doing what pleases God and not doing what pleases God. Alternate translation: “whether we do not always please God or whether we do what pleases him” +5:11 r921 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces what Paul wants the Thessalonians to do in response to what he has told them about Jesus’ second coming and how to be ready for it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the application of a specific teaching. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Now that I have taught you these things” +5:11 m2c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 The commands **encourage one another** and **build up one the one** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “encourage one another” or “build one another up” +5:11 fx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the Thessalonian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help one the one become more faithful to Christ” +5:11 kdae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 Here, the phrase **one the one** indicates that each person should be building up each other person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to people building each other up. Alternate translation: “one another” +5:11 sfv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε 1 Here Paul means that the Thessalonians are already doing what he is asking them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which indeed you are already doing for each other” +5:12 pd47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” +5:12 fqh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul is describing one group of people who do three different things. He is not making distinctions between three different groups. Make sure that your translation refers to only one group of people. Alternate translation: “the people who labor among you, who lead you in the Lord, and who admonish you” or “your leaders who labor among you and lead you in the Lord and admonish you” +5:12 dhf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul could be using these three phrases: (1) to refer to three distinct activities. Alternate translation: “the ones laboring among you, leading you in the Lord, and admonishing you” (2) to refer to one primary activity (**laboring**) that he defines as **leading** and **admonishing**. Alternate translation: “the ones laboring among you by leading you in the Lord and by admonishing you” +5:12 f4jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with **the Lord**. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to Christ, could: (1) identify the leaders as those who lead people who believe in Christ. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as Christ’s people” (2) indicate that **the Lord** has authorized these leaders. Alternate translation: “as the Lord has authorized them” or “as representatives of the Lord” +5:13 jq0o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the reason before the result. Alternate translation: “and, because of their work, to regard them highly in love” +5:13 mih6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 Here, the phrase **in love** could give: (1) the context in which the Thessalonians should **regard them highly**. In other words, the Thessalonians should **regard them highly** while they are loving them. Alternate translation: “while you are loving them to regard them highly” (2) the manner in which the Thessalonians should **regard them highly**. Alternate translation: “to regard them highly by loving them” or “to regard them with great love” +5:13 rdgo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **regard them highly** means that the Thessalonians should greatly respect and honor their leaders in the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to hold them in high esteem” or “to treat them with respect” +5:13 p6m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and in a loving way” or “and love them” +5:13 rqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρηνεύετε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Act peaceably” +5:14 tdxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +5:14 g34k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νουθετεῖτε τοὺς ἀτάκτους, παραμυθεῖσθε τοὺς ὀλιγοψύχους, ἀντέχεσθε τῶν ἀσθενῶν, μακροθυμεῖτε πρὸς πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjectives **disorderly**, **discouraged**, **weak**, and **all** as nouns to refer to groups of people who can be described by these adjectives. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “Admonish disorderly people, comfort discouraged people, help weak people, be patient toward all people” +5:14 ph3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἀτάκτους 1 Here, the word **disorderly** could describe: (1) people who live in undisciplined and disruptive ways. Alternate translation: “the undisciplined” (2) people who refuse to work to support themselves. Alternate translation: “the idle” or “the lazy” +5:14 yhzw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντας 1 Here, the word **all** could refer to: (1) people in general. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) just believers. Alternate translation: “all believers” +5:15 vlp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁρᾶτε 1 Here Paul tells the Thessalonians to see or look at what he wants them to do. He means that he wants them to make sure that it happens. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Ensure that” +5:15 dqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ 1 Here Paul means that the Thessalonians should not do what is **evil** to people who have done what is **evil**. In other words, when someone treats them badly, they should not respond in the same way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “retaliates against anyone who hurts you” or “responds with evil to anyone who does evil” +5:15 oz10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **but** introduces a command that is in contrast with repaying **evil for evil**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “and instead,” +5:15 mc2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διώκετε 1 Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Corinthians to run after and try to capture **{what is} good**. He speaks in this way because he wants them to do **{what is} good** as persistently as someone who pursues someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “seek after” or “try to do” +5:15 pe3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ εἰς ἀλλήλους καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 Here, the phrase **one another** refers to the believers in Thessalonica. The word **all** refers to all people, whether they are believers or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “both for your fellow believers and for all people” or “both for each other and for all other people” +5:15 i0jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun to refer to a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all people” or “everybody” +5:17 l63i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **continually** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “very regularly” or “extremely often” +5:18 bt5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ 1 Here, the phrase **In everything** could refer to: (1) every situation or experience. Alternate translation: “In everything that you experience” or “In every circumstance” (2) every moment in time. Alternate translation: “At every time” or “At all times” +5:18 q7gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εὐχαριστεῖτε & γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** could introduce a reason or basis for: (1) the three commands in [5:16–18](../05/16.md). Alternate translation: “give thanks. Do these things since” (2) just the command to **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “give thanks, which you should do since” +5:18 l3sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the three commands in [5:16–18](../05/16.md) Alternate translation: “these are” (2) just the command to **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “that is” +5:18 sw8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God desires” +5:18 mbz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul could mean: (1) that the **will of God** has been revealed **in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “the will of God that has been revealed in Christ Jesus for you” or “the will of God as Christ Jesus has shown it to you” (2) that the **will of God** is for people who are **in Christ Jesus**. In other words, these commands are what God wants people who are in union with **Christ Jesus** to do. Alternate translation: “the will of God for you who are united to Christ Jesus” +5:19 j1ei rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Paul speaks of the Holy **Spirit** as if he were a fire that that the Thessalonians should not **quench**. Paul means that the Thessalonians should not hinder or oppose the work of the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not restrain the Spirit” or “Do not hinder the Spirit” +5:20 rrza rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Here Paul may be giving a specific example of his command not to “quench the Spirit” in [5:19](../05/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Specifically, do not despise” or “For example, do not despise” +5:20 iv1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **despise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “Honor” or “Respect” +5:21 fmot rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **Test all things**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “But test all things.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +5:21 ihzh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Here Paul could be referring to: (1) the “prophecies” that he referred to in the previous verse (see [5:20](../05/20.md)). Alternate translation: “Test all prophecies. Hold fast to those that are good” (2) spiritual gifts, or how the Holy Spirit specially empowers each person. Alternate translation: “Test all spiritual gifts. Hold fast to those that do what is good” (3) anything people say and do. Alternate translation: “Test all things that people say and do. Hold fast to those that are good” +5:21 n1jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Here Paul speaks as if **what {is} good** were an object that the Thessalonians could grasp tightly. He means that they should believe and act based on whatever is **good**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Adhere to what is good” or “Follow what is good” +5:22 p7gz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ ἀπέχεσθε 1 Here, much as in the previous verse ([5:22](../05/22.md)), Paul could be referring to: (1) the “prophecies” that he referred to in [5:20](../05/20.md). Alternate translation: “Keep yourselves from every form of evil prophecy” (2) spiritual gifts, or how the Holy Spirit specially empowers each person. Alternate translation: “Keep yourselves from every form of spiritual gift that does what is evil” (3) anything people say and do. Alternate translation: “Keep yourselves from every form of what people say and do that is evil” +5:22 ics0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **every form** that is characterized by **evil**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every form that evil takes” or “evil in any form” +5:22 z9k0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴδους 1 Here, the word translated **form** could refer to: (1) a type or kind of something. Alternate translation: “type” (2) the way that something looks or appears. Alternate translation: “appearance” +5:23 ww4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section, a blessing from Paul to the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +5:23 mqi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τηρηθείη 1 Here Paul is asking God to bless the Thessalonians. You could express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we ask the God of peace himself to sanctify you completely, and we ask that your whole spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly at the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ” +5:23 sbxc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form **the God of peace**, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (see [Romans 15:33](../rom/15/33.md); [16:20](../rom/16/20.md); [Philippians 4:9](../php/04/09.md); [Hebrews 13:20](../heb/13/20.md)). In this context, the phrase **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (2) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (3) Both. Alternate translation: “the peaceful God who gives peace” +5:23 os5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the idea in another way. Make sure that your translation fits the option you chose in the previous note about how **God** and **peace** relate. Alternate translation: “the peaceful God” or “the God who makes people peaceful” +5:23 nb1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun “he,” which is already implied in the the phrase **the God of peace**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **himself**. Alternate translation: “may he who is the God of peace sanctify” or “may the God of peace indeed sanctify” +5:23 xvfz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) a second blessing or prayer. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a more specific explanation of the first blessing or prayer. Alternate translation: “that is,” or “and more specifically,” +5:23 vkhs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως & τηρηθείη. 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “may he keep blamelessly your whole spirit, and soul, and body” +5:23 s36k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Here Paul uses the three terms **spirit**, **soul**, and **body** together to refer to the whole person. These three terms could: (1) describe different aspects of the whole person from different perspectives. In this case, the three terms do not define three separate pieces that together make up a person. You could use fewer or more terms to refer to different aspects of the person. Alternate translation: “your whole body and soul” or “your whole life, mind, feelings, and desires” (2) describe three separate pieces that together make up a person. In this case, you should use two terms to refer to two different non-physical parts (**spirit** and **soul**) and one term to refer to one physical part (**body**). Alternate translation: “your whole mind, and life, and flesh” +5:23 gcy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀμέμπτως 1 Here, the word **blamelessly** could refer to: (1) the situation in which the **spirit**, **soul**, and **body** are **kept**. Alternate translation: “in a blameless state” (2) the result of the **spirit**, **soul**, and **body** being **kept**. Alternate translation: “so that they are blameless” +5:23 nyma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:15](../04/15.md). Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth” or “at return of our Lord Jesus Christ to us” +5:23 tzxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:24 i03k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 Here, the clause **Faithful {is} the one calling you** gives the reason why God will be the one **who will also do {it}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because the one calling you is faithful, he also will do it” +5:24 c3jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς 1 Here, the pronouns **he** and **who** refer to “the God of peace” (see [5:23](../05/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to God. Alternate translation: “is God who calls you, who” +5:24 lg3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποιήσει 1 Here Paul does not state directly what God **will do**. He implies that God will do what Paul prayed for in the previous verse (see [5:23](../05/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “will do those things” or “will do what I have prayed for” +5:25 xxi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσεύχεσθε καὶ 1 Here, **also** indicates that the Thessalonians should be praying for Paul, Silas, and Timothy just as Paul, Silas, and Timothy pray for them (see [5:23](../05/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “just as we pray for you, pray also” +5:26 v9iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐν φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 A **holy kiss** was a symbolic action to show familial love between believers. In some cultures, a kiss as a greeting is appropriate, but in other cultures it is not appropriate. The idea of a **holy kiss** is that it be a greeting that is appropriate in the culture, whether it be a kiss, a hug, a handshake, or something else, and also that it be holy, that is, appropriate between God’s people. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “warmly, as fellow believers” +5:27 xn0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula ἐνορκίζω ὑμᾶς τὸν Κύριον 1 The phrase **{by} the Lord** could be: (1) an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I make you swear before the Lord” or “I solemnly require that you promise the Lord” (2) Paul’s claim that **the Lord** has authorized him. Alternate translation: “As one who represents the Lord, I solemnly charge you” +5:27 n5cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 In Paul’s culture, letters sent to a group were normally **read** out loud by one person to everyone else in the group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to have this letter read by somebody out loud” +5:27 yp7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone read this letter” +5:27 pqkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶσιν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **all the brothers**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “all the holy brothers.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +5:28 ykkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Thessalonians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ within you” or “I pray that you will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” +5:28 n8ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ act graciously toward you” +5:28 ccb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:28 d35d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **{be} with you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add “Amen” after **{be} with you**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.